VFD-BW
Preface
Thank you for choosing DELTA’s high-performance VFD-BW Series. The VFD-BW Series is
manufactured with high-quality components and materials and incorporates the latest microprocessor
technology available.
This manual is to be used for the installation, parameter setting, troubleshooting, and daily
maintenance of the AC motor drive. To guarantee safe operation of the equipment, read the following
safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive. Keep this operating manual at hand
and distribute to all users for reference.
To ensure the safety of operators and equipment, only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor
drive are to do installation, start-up and maintenance. Always read this manual thoroughly before
using VFD-BW series AC Motor Drive, especially the WARNING, DANGER and CAUTION notes.
Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage. If you have any questions,
please contact your dealer.
PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.
DANGER!
1.
Ensure that VFD-BW is grounded in a correct way before putting it into use.
2.
AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made.
3.
A charge may still remain in the DC-link capacitors with hazardous voltages, even if the power
has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that power has been turned off
before opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe
voltage levels.
4.
Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
5.
The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the
input/output terminals. Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply.
6.
Ground the VFD-BW using the ground terminal. The grounding method must comply with the
laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed. Refer to the Basic Wiring
Diagram.
7.
VFD-BW series is used only to control variable speed of 3-phase induction motors, NOT for 1phase motors or other purpose.
8.
VFD-BW series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation.
WARNING!
1.
DO NOT use Hi-pot test for internal components. The semi-conductor used in the AC motor
drive is easily damaged by high-pressure.
2.
There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These components
are especially sensitive to static electricity. To prevent damage to these components, do not
touch these components or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands.
3.
Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain AC motor drives.
CAUTION!
1.
Some parameter settings will cause the motor to run immediately after applying power.
2.
DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature, direct sunlight,
high humidity, excessive vibration, corrosive gases or liquids, or airborne dust or metallic
particles.
3.
Only use AC motor drives within specification. Failure to comply may result in fire, explosion or
electric shock.
4.
To prevent personal injury, please keep children and unqualified people away from the
equipment.
5.
When the motor cable between the AC motor drive and motor is too long, the layer insulation of
the motor may be damaged. Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output
reactor to prevent damage to the motor. Refer to appendix B Reactor for details.
6.
The rated voltage for the AC motor drive must be ≤ 480V for 460V models and the mains
supply current capacity must be ≤ 5000A RMS (≤10000A RMS for the ≥ 40hp (30kW) models).
Table of Contents
Preface ............................................................................................................. i
Table of Contents .......................................................................................... iii
Chapter 1 Introduction ................................................................................ 1-1
1.1 Receiving and Inspection ................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Nameplate Information................................................................ 1-1
1.1.2 Model Explanation ...................................................................... 1-1
1.1.3 Series Number Explanation ........................................................ 1-2
1.1.4 Drive Frames .............................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Appearances ...................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Preparation for Installation and Wiring ............................................... 1-5
1.3.1 Remove Keypad ......................................................................... 1-5
1.3.2 Remove Front Cover................................................................... 1-6
1.3.3 Unpacking Instruction ................................................................. 1-8
1.4 Lifting................................................................................................ 1-10
1.5 Storage............................................................................................. 1-13
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring .............................................................. 2-1
2.1 Ambient Conditions ............................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Installation .......................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Dimensions......................................................................................... 2-3
2.4 Wiring ............................................................................................... 2-14
2.4.1 Basic Wiring .............................................................................. 2-14
2.4.2 External Wiring .......................................................................... 2-20
2.4.3 Main Terminals Connections ..................................................... 2-21
2.4.4 Control Terminals ...................................................................... 2-23
2.4.5 Specifications for Power Terminals and Control Terminals ....... 2-27
Chapter 3 Start Up .......................................................................................3-1
3.1 Preparations before Start-up...............................................................3-1
3.2 Operation Method ...............................................................................3-2
3.3 Trial Run .............................................................................................3-2
Chapter 4 Digital Keypad Operation ..........................................................4-1
4.1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD-PU01......................................4-1
4.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad VFD-PU01 ..................................4-3
Chapter 5 Parameters..................................................................................5-1
5.1 Summary of Parameter Settings.........................................................5-2
5.2 Parameter Settings for Applications..................................................5-21
5.3 Description of Parameter Settings ....................................................5-27
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information ..............................................................6-1
6.1 Common Problems and Solutions ......................................................6-1
6.2 Reset ..................................................................................................6-5
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting .........................................................................7-1
7.1 Over Current (OC) ..............................................................................7-1
7.2 Ground Fault.......................................................................................7-2
7.3 Over Voltage (OV) ..............................................................................7-2
7.4 Low Voltage (Lv).................................................................................7-3
7.5 Over Heat (OH)...................................................................................7-4
7.6 Overload............................................................................................. 7-4
7.7 Display of PU01 is Abnormal.............................................................. 7-5
7.8 Phase Loss (PHL) .............................................................................. 7-5
7.9 Motor cannot Run............................................................................... 7-6
7.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed..................................................... 7-7
7.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration....................................................... 7-8
7.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected .............................................. 7-8
7.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise ...................................................... 7-9
7.14 Environmental Condition .................................................................. 7-9
7.15 Affecting Other Machines ............................................................... 7-10
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspections ................................................... 8-1
Appendix A Specifications ........................................................................ A-1
Appendix B Accessories ........................................................................... B-1
B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives..............B-1
B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors ............................ B-4
B.1.2 Specifications for Brake Unit ...................................................... B-5
B.1.3 Dimensions for Brake Unit .......................................................... B-6
B.2 AMD - EMI Filter Cross Reference.....................................................B-8
B.2.1 Dimensions............................................................................... B-11
B.3 PG Card (for Encoder) .....................................................................B-16
B.3.1 PG02 ........................................................................................ B-16
B.3.1.1 Installation......................................................................... B-16
B.3.1.2 PG Card and Pulse Generator (Encoder) ......................... B-17
B.3.1.3 PG-02 Terminal Descriptions............................................ B-18
B.3.2 PG03.........................................................................................B-21
B.3.2.1 Installation .........................................................................B-21
B.3.2.2 PG Card and Pulse Generator (Encoder)..........................B-22
B.3.2.3 PG-03 Terminal Descriptions ............................................B-23
B.4 Remote Controller RC-01 ................................................................ B-26
B.5 Remote Panel Adapter (RPA 01) .................................................... B-27
B.6 AC Reactor...................................................................................... B-28
B.6.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value ...................................B-28
B.6.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value ................................B-28
B.6.3 Applications for AC Reactor ......................................................B-29
B.7 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A) ................................................. B-31
B.8 DC Choke Recommended Values................................................... B-36
B.9 No-fuse Circuit Breaker Chart ......................................................... B-36
B.10 Fuse Specification Chart ............................................................... B-37
B.11 PU06 ............................................................................................. B-38
B.11.1 Description of the Digital keypad VFD-PU06 ..........................B-38
B.11.2 Explanation of Display Message .............................................B-38
B.11.3 Operation Flow Chart..............................................................B-39
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive .............................. C-1
C.1 Capacity Formulas ............................................................................ C-2
C.2 General Precaution ........................................................................... C-4
C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor....................................................... C-5
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Receiving and Inspection
This VFD-BW AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before
shipment. After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following:
„ Check to make sure that the package includes an AC motor drive, a user manual, dust
covers and rubber bushings.
„ Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment.
„ Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part
number of your order.
1.1.1 Nameplate Information
Example for 1HP/0.75kW 3-phase 460V AC motor drive
AC Drive Model
Input Spec.
O utput Spec .
Output Frequency Range
Enclosure ty pe
MODEL
:VFD007B43W
INPUT
:3PH 380~480V 50/60Hz 3.2A
OUT PUT
:3PH 0~480V 2.7A 2.3kVA 1HP
Fr eq. Range :0.1~400Hz
ENCLOSURE :TYPE 1
Bar Code
Serial Number
007 B43W 0W6100 001
1.1.2 Model Explanation
VFD 0 07 B 43 W
Vers ion Type
Mains Input Voltage
43:460V 3-PHASE
B Series
Appl icable Motor Capac ity
300:40HP(30k W)
007:1HP(0.75kW)
370:50HP(37k W)
015:2HP(1.5kW)
450:60HP(45k W)
022:3HP(2.2kW)
550:75HP(55k W)
037:5HP(3.7kW)
危
險!
750:100HP(75kW)
055:7.5HP(5.5kW)
900:125HP(90kW)
075:10HP(7.5kW)
1100:150HP(110kW)
110:15HP(11kW)
1320:175H P(132kW)
150:20HP(15k W)
1600:215H P(160kW)
185:25HP(18.5kW)
1850:250H P(185kW)
220:30HP(22k W)
Series Name ( V ariable F requency D rive)
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
1-1
Chapter 1 Introduction|VFD-BW Series
1.1.3 Series Number Explanation
007 B43W 0 W 6 10 0 001
Produc tion number
Produc tion week
Produc tion year 2006
T: Taoyuan W: Wuji ang
460V 3-PHASE 1HP( 0.75kW)
Produc tion fac tory
Model
If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are
any problems, please contact your distributor.
1.1.4 Drive Frames
Frame
1-2
Power Range
Models
A
1hp (0.75kW)
VFD007B43W
A1
1-2hp (0.75-1.5kW)
VFD015B43W
A2
2-3hp (1.5-2.2kW)
VFD022B43W
B
3-5hp (2.2-3.7kW)
VFD037B43W
C
7.5-15hp (5.5-11kW)
VFD055B43W, VFD075B43W, VFD110B43W
D
20-30hp (15-22kW)
VFD150B43W, VFD185B43W, VFD220B43W
E
40-60hp (30-45kW)
VFD300B43W, VFD370B43W, VFD450B43W
E1
40-100hp (30-75kW)
VFD550B43W, VFD750B43W
F2
125-175hp(90-132kW)
VFD900B43W, VFD1100B43W, VFD1320B43W
G
215-250hp(160-185kW)
VFD1600B43W, VFD1850B43W
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 1 Introduction|VFD-BW Series
1.2 Appearances
(Refer to chapter 2.3 for exact dimensions)
1-3HP/0.75-2.2kW(Frame A, A1, A2)
5HP/2.2-3.7kW(Frame B)
7.5-15HP/5.5-11kW(Frame C)
20-30HP/15-22kW(Frame D)
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
1-3
Chapter 1 Introduction|VFD-BW Series
40-100HP/30-75kW(Frame E, E1)
1-4
75-100HP/55-75kW(Frame F)
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 1 Introduction|VFD-BW Series
1.3 Preparation for Installation and Wiring
1.3.1 Remove Keypad
1-3HP/0.75-2.2kW(Frame A, A1, A2)
3-5HP/2.2-3.7kW(Frame B)
7.5-15HP/5.5-11kW(Frame C)
20-30HP/15-22kW(Frame D)
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
1-5
Chapter 1 Introduction|VFD-BW Series
40-100HP/30-75kW(Frame E, E1)
75-100HP/55-75kW(Frame F)
1.3.2 Remove Front Cover
1-3HP/0.75-2.2kW(Frame A, A1, A2)
1-6
3-5HP/2.2-3.7kW(Frame B)
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 1 Introduction|VFD-BW Series
7.5-15HP/5.5-11kW(Frame C)
20-30HP/15-22kW(Frame D)
40-100HP/30-75kW(Frame E, E1)
75-100HP/55-75kW(Frame F)
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
1-7
Chapter 1 Introduction|VFD-BW Series
1.3.3 Unpacking Instruction
For 125-175HP (Frame F2)
Step 1: Unscrew all the cover screws.
Step 2: Lift the wooden box.
Step 3: Lift the EPE.
Step 4: Lift the AC motor drive following the
steps in 1.4 Lifting.
1-8
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 1 Introduction|VFD-BW Series
For 215-250HP (Frame G)
Step 1: Unscrew all the cover screws (24
screws).
Step 2: Lift the wooden box and EPE.
Step 3: Unscrew the 12 screws that fixed
the AC motor drive to the pallet and
remove 4 wooden slats.
Step 4: Lift the AC motor drive following the
steps in 1.4 Lifting.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
1-9
Chapter 1 Introduction|VFD-BW Series
1.4 Lifting
Please carry only fully assembled AC motor drives as shown in the following.
For 40-100HP (Frame E, E1 and F)
1-10
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 1 Introduction|VFD-BW Series
For 125-175HP (Frame F2)
Step 1
Step 2
Step3
Step4
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
1-11
Chapter 1 Introduction|VFD-BW Series
For 215-250HP (Frame G)
1-12
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 1 Introduction|VFD-BW Series
1.5 Storage
The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to retain
the warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an
extended period of time. Storage conditions are:
Store in a clean and dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes.
Store within an ambient temperature range of -20 °C to +60 °C.
Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment.
Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA.
CAUTION!
1.
DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature. It may cause condensation and
frost.
2.
DO NOT place on the ground directly. It should be stored properly. Moreover, if the surrounding
environment is humid, you should put exsiccator in the package.
3.
If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months, the temperature should not be higher
than 30 °C. Storage longer than one year is not recommended, it could result in the degradation
of the electrolytic capacitors.
4.
When the AC motor drive is not used for a long time after installation on building sites or places
with humidity and dust, it’s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
1-13
Chapter 1 Introduction|VFD-BW Series
This page intentionally left blank.
1-14
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
2.1 Ambient Conditions
Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions:
Operation
Air Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Atmosphere pressure:
Installation Site Altitude:
Vibration:
-10 ~ +40°C (14 ~ 104°F)
<90%, no condensation allowed
86 ~ 106 kPa
<1000m
<20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max
20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max
Storage
Transportation
Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Atmosphere pressure:
Vibration:
-20°C ~ +60°C (-4°F ~ 140°F)
<90%, no condensation allowed
86 ~ 106 kPa
<20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max
20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max
Pollution Degree
2: good for a factory type environment.
CAUTION!
1.
Operating, storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause
damage to the AC motor drive.
2.
Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty!
2.2 Installation
1.
Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface by using bolts or screws. Other
directions are not allowed.
2.
The AC motor drive will generate heat during operation. Allow sufficient space around the unit
for heat dissipation.
3.
The heat sink temperature may rise to 90°C when running. The material on which the AC motor
drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high temperature.
4.
When the AC motor drive is installed in a confined space (e.g. cabinet), the surrounding
temperature must be within 10 ~ 40°C with good ventilation. DO NOT install the AC motor drive
in a space with bad ventilation.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-1
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
5.
When installing multiple AC motor drives in the same cabinet, they should be adjacent in a row
with enough space in-between. When installing one AC motor drive below another one, use a
metal separation barrier between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating.
6.
Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, saw dust, metal particles, etc. from adhering to the
heatsink.
Minimum Mounting Clearances
H
Air Flow
FWD
REV
PROG
DATA
W
W
H
W
H
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
1-5HP
50 (2)
150 (6)
7.5-20HP
75 (3)
175 (7)
25-75HP
75 (3)
200 (8)
100HP and above
75 (3)
250 (10)
HP
2-2
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
2.3 Dimensions
(Dimensions are in millimeter and [inch])
Frame A: VFD007B43W
145.0 [5.71]
118.0 [4.65]
108.0 [4.25]
185.0 [7.28]
173.0 [6.81]
5.5[0.22]
0.87]
22.0[
10](2X)
28.0[ 1.
R2.
.11]
75[0
5.5[0.22]
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-3
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Frame A1: VFD015B43W
160.0 [6.30]
118.0 [4.65]
108.0 [4.25]
185.0 [7.28]
173.0 [6.81]
5.5[0.22]
22.0[
0.87]
10](2X)
28.0[ 1.
1
5[0.
R2.7
1]
5.5[0.22]
2-4
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Frame A2: VFD022B43W
145.0 [5.71]
118.0 [4.65]
108.0 [4.25]
185.0 [7.28]
173.0 [6.81]
5.5[0.22]
0.87]
22.0[
0](2X)
28.0[ 1.1
.11]
75[0
R2.
5.5[0.22]
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-5
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Frame B: VFD037B43W
150.0 [5.91]
135.0 [5.32]
5[
]
26
160.2 [6.31]
244.3 [9.63]
260.0[10.24]
6.
0.
0.
X)
6
28
.0 [
1 .1
0](
2
.5 [
0.
]
26
11.2 [0.44]
2
0[
2.
](2
87
X)
UNIT : mm(inch)
2-6
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Frame C: VFD055B43W, VFD075B43W, VFD110B43W
]
28
0.
183.2 [7.22]
13.5 [0.53]
323.0 [12.72]
0[
7.
303.0 [11.93]
200.0 [7.88]
185.6 [7.31]
7.0 [0.28]
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-7
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Frame D: VFD150B43W, VFD185B43W, VFD220B43W
250.0 [9.84]
10.0 [ 0.39]
2-8
403.8 [15.90]
205.4 [8.08]
)
](2X
.65
1
0[
42.
13.0 [0.51]
28
.0[
1 .1
0]
384.0 [15.12]
226.0 [8.90]
10.0 [0.39]
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Frame E: VFD300B43W, VFD370B43W, VFD450B43W
370.0 [14.57]
260.0 [10.24]
589.0 [23.19]
560.0 [22.05]
595.0 [23.43]
335.0 [13.19]
18.0 [0.71]
21.0[0.83]
132.5 [5.22]
R6.5[0.25]
13.0[0.51]
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-9
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Frame E1: VFD550B43W, VFD750B43W
370.0 [14.57]
260.0 [10.24]
589.0 [23.19]
560.0 [22.05]
335.0 [13.19]
18.0 [0.71]
21.0[0.83]
132.5 [5.22]
R6.5[0.25]
13.0[0.51]
2-10
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Frame F2: VFD900B43W, VFD1100B43W, VFD1320B43W
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-11
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Frame G: VFD1600B43W, VFD1850B43W
2-12
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
VFD-PU01
Unit: mm [inch]
110.0 [4.33]
STOP
6.5 [0.26]
RUN
77.0 [3.03]
PROG
DATA
8]
.5
[1
.0
40
MODE
M4* 0.7(2X)
?
JOG
44.0 [1.73]
97.0 [3.82]
19.0 [0.75]
73.0 [2.87]
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-13
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
2.4 Wiring
After removing the front cover, check if the power and control terminals are clear of debris. Be sure
to observe the following precautions when wiring.
2.4.1 Basic Wiring
„ Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply
may result in damage to the equipment. The voltage and current should lie within the range
as indicated on the nameplate.
„ Check the following items after completing the wiring:
1. Are all connections correct?
2. No loose wires?
3. No short-circuits between terminals or to ground?
A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power has
been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that the power is turned off and wait ten
minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC motor drive.
DANGER!
1.
All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent electric shock,
fire and interference.
2.
Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives are allowed to perform installation, wiring
and commissioning.
3.
Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shocks.
Basic Wiring Diagrams
Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages. Do not plug a
modem or telephone line to the RS-485 communication port or permanent damage may result. The
pins 1 & 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad PU06 only and should not be used for
RS-485 communication.
2-14
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Figure 1 for models of VFD-BW series
VFD007B43W; VFD015B43W; VFD022B43W
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
DC choke
(optional) Brake Resistor
(optional)
Built-in Brake Unit
Jumper
NFB(Non-fuse Breaker)
+1
R(L1)
+2/B1
B2
U(T1)
R(L1)
S(L2)
S(L2)
V(T2)
T(L3)
T(L3)
W(T3)
Factory Setting:
Sink Mode
Sink
SA
MC
ON
REV/STOP
JOG
SW1
Source
Please refer to Figure 5
for wiring of SINK
mode and SOURCE
mode.
Factory
setting
RA
RC
MC
FWD/STOP
E.F.
Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
RESET
Accel/Decel prohibit
Counter
Digital Signal Common
* Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
RB
RC
+24V
FWD
MO1
JOG
EF
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MO2
Factory setting:
Master freq. attained indication
MO3
Factory setting:
AC motor drive ready indication
Multi-function
Photocoupler Output
MCM
MI6
TRG
AFM
DCM
ACM
3
2
1
4~20mA
-10~+10V
Analog Signal Common
Main circuit (power) terminals
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
+10V
Power Supply
+10V 20mA
AVI
Master Frequency
0~10V(47K )
ACI
AUI
ACM
Multi-function Relay Output
240VAC 2.5A
120VAC 5A
28VDC 5A
Factory setting:
Fault indication
Factory setting:
AC drive operational indication
(open collector output) 48VDC 50mA
REV
DFM
5K
M
3~
RB
Multi-function
input terminals
Recommended Circuit when
power supply is turned OFF
by a fault output.
The contact will be ON
when the fault occurs to
OFF
turn off the power and
protect the power system.
Motor
DCM
6←1
Analog Multi-function Output
Terminal
Factory setting: Analog freq.
/ current meter 0~10VDC/2mA
Analog Signal Common
Digital Frequency Output
Terminal
factory setting: 1:1
Duty=50%
Digital Signal Common
RS-485
Serial Communication Interface
1: EV
2: GND
3: SG4: SG+
5: Reserved
6: Reserved
Control circuit terminals
2-15
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Figure 2 for models of VFD-BW series
VFD037B43W; VFD055B43W; VFD075B43W; VFD110B43W
Brake Resisitor
(optional)
BR
DC chock
(optional)
BR
Jumper
NFB(Non-fuse Breaker)
+1
Brake Unit (optional)
VFDB
Brake Resisitor
(optional)
+2/B1
B2
-
R
R(L1)
U(T1)
S
S(L2)
V(T2)
T
T(L3)
Factory Setting:
Sink Mode
Sink
SW1
Source
SA
MC
ON
RA
RC
MC
FWD/S TOP
RE V/STOP
JOG
E.F.
Please refer to Figure 5 Multi-step 1
for wiring of SINK
Multi-step 2
mode and SOURCE
mode.
Multi-step 3
Factory
setting
W(T3)
Multi-step 4
RESET
Accel/Decel prohib it
Counter
Digital Signal Common
* Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
RB
RC
+24V
FWD
5K
2
1
4~20mA
-10~+10V
Analog Signal Common
Main circuit (power) terminals
2-16
M
3~
Factory setting:
AC drive operational indication
(open collector output) 48VDC 50mA
MO2
Factory setting:
Master freq. Attained indication
MO3
Factory setting:
AC motor drive ready Indication
REV
JOG
EF
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
TRG
DCM
+10V
Power Supply
+10V 20mA
AVI
Master Frequency
0~10V(47K )
ACI
AUI
ACM
Multi-function Relay Output
240VAC 2.5A
120VAC 5A
28VDC 5A
Factory setting:
Fault indication
MO1
MCM
AFM
ACM
DFM
3
Motor
RB
Multi-function
Input Terminals
Recommended Circuit when
power supply is turned OFF
by a fault outpu t.
The contact will be ON
when the fault occurs to
OFF
turn off the po wer and
protect the power system.
Built-in Brake Unit
DCM
6←1
Multi-function
Photocoupler Output
Analog Multi-function Output
Terminal
Factory setting: Analog freq.
/ current meter 0~10VDC/2mA
Analog Signal Common
Digital Frequency Output
Terminal
Factory setting: 1:1
Duty=50%
Digital Signal Common
RS -485
Serial Communication Interface
1: EV
2: GND
3: SG4: SG+
5: Reserved
6: Reserved
Control circuit terminals
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Figure 3 for models of VFD-BW series
VFD150B43W; VFD185B43W; VFD220B43W
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Brake Resistor
(optional)
BR
Short-circuit between [+1, +2]
are strictly prohibited.
+1
S CR
VFDB
Brake Unit (optional)
+2
NFB(Non-fuse Breaker)
U(T1)
R(L1) Starting
Resistor
R
S
S(L2)
V(T2)
T
T(L3)
W(T3)
Factory setting:
SINK Mode
Sink
SW1
SA
MC
ON
RC
REV/STOP
JOG
E.F.
Source
Please refer to Figure 5 Multi-step 1
for w ir ing of SINK
Multi-step 2
mode and SO URCE
mode.
Factory
setting
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
RE SET
Accel/Decel prohib it
Counter
Digital Signal Common
* Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
3
5K
2
1
4~20mA
-10~+10V
Analog Signal Common
Main circuit (power) terminals
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
RA
MC
FWD/STOP
M
3~
RB
RB
+24V
RC
FWD
REV
JOG
EF
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MO1
Multi-function
Input Terminals
Recommended Circuit when
power supply is turned OFF
by a fault output.
The contact will be ON
when the fault occurs to
OFF
turn off the po wer and
protect the power system.
Motor
Factory setting:
AC drive operational indication
(open collector output) 48VDC 50mA
MO2
Factory setting:
Master freq. A ttained indication
MO3
TRG
DCM
Factory setting:
AC motor drive ready indication
Multi-function
Photocoupler Output
MCM
AFM
ACM
+10V
Power Supply
+10V 20mA
AVI
Master Frequency
0~10V(47K )
ACI
AUI
ACM
Multi-function Relay Output
240VAC 2.5A
120VAC 5A
28V DC 5A
Factory setting:
Fault indication
DFM
DCM
6←1
Analog Multi-function Output
Terminal
factory setting: Analog freq.
/ current meter 0~10VDC/2mA
Analog Signal Common
Digital Frequency Output
Terminal
Factory setting: 1:1
Duty=50%
Digital Signal Common
RS-485
Serial Communication Interface
1: EV
2: GND
3: SG4: SG+
5: Reserved
6: Reserved
Control circuit terminals
2-17
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Figure 4 for models of VFD-BW series
VFD300B43W; VFD370B43W; VFD450B43W; VFD550B43W; VFD750B43W;
VFD900B43W; VFD1100B43W; VFD1320B43W; VFD1600B43W; VFD1850B43W
DC chock
(optional)
Brake Resistor
(optional)
BR
VFDB
Brake Unit (optional)
Jumper
NFB(Non-fuse Breaker)
+1/P1
R(L1)
U(T1)
S
S(L2)
V(T2)
T(L3)
W(T3)
T
Factory setting:
SINK Mode
Sink
SW1
SA
MC
ON
RC
REV/STOP
JOG
E.F.
Source
Please refer to Figure 5 Multi-step 1
for wiring of SINK
Multi-step 2
mode and SOURCE
mode.
Multi-step 3
Factory
setting
Multi-step 4
RESET
Accel/Decel prohibit
Counter
Digital Signal Common
* Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
3
5K
2
1
4~20mA
-10~+10V
Analog Signal Common
Main circuit (power) terminals
RA
MC
FWD/STOP
Motor
M
3~
RB
RB
+24V
RC
FWD
REV
JOG
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
Factory setting:
AC drive operational indication
(open collector output) 48VDC 50mA
MO2
Factory setting:
Master freq. Attained indication
MO3
MI6
TRG
DCM
MCM
AFM
ACM
+10V
Power Supply
+10V 20mA
AVI
Master Frequency
0~10V(47K )
ACI
AUI
ACM
Multi-function Relay Output
240VAC 2.5A
120VAC 5A
28VDC 5A
Factory setting:
Fault indication
MO1
EF
Multi-function
Input Terminals
Recommended Circuit when
pow er supply is turned OFF
by a fault output.
The contact will be ON
when the fault occurs to
OFF
turn off the power and
protect the power system.
2-18
+2/P2
R
DFM
DCM
6←1
Factory setting:
AC motor drive ready indication
Multi-function
Photocoupler Output
Analog Multi-function Output
Terminal
factory setting: Analog freq.
/ current meter 0~10VDC/2mA
Analog Signal Common
Digital Frequency Output
Terminal
Factory setting: 1:1
Duty=50%
Digital Signal Common
RS-485
Serial Communication Interface
1: EV
2: GND
3: SG4: SG+
5: Reserved
6: Reserved
Control circuit terminals
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Figure 5 Wiring for SINK mode and SOURCE mode
Factory setting:
SINK Mode
Sink
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
SW1
JOG
E.F.
Source
Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Factory
Setting
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
RESET
Accel/Decel prohibit
Counter
Digital Signal Common
+24V
FWD
REV
JOG
EF
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
TRG
DCM
* Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
SOURCE Mode
Sink
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
JOG
SW1
E.F.
Source
Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Factory
Setting
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
RESET
Accel/Decel prohibit
Counter
+24V
FWD
REV
JOG
EF
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
TRG
DCM
* Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-19
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
2.4.2 External Wiring
Power Supply
Items
Power
supply
Fuse/NFB
(Optional)
There may be an inrush current
during power up. Please check the
chart of Appendix B and select the
correct fuse with rated current. Use of
an NFB is optional.
Magnetic
contactor
(Optional)
Please do not use a Magnetic
contactor as the I/O switch of the AC
motor drive, as it will reduce the
operating life cycle of the AC drive.
FUSE/NFB
Magnetic
contactor
Input AC
Line Reactor
Zer o-phase
Reactor
EMI Filter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+1
DC
Chock
BR
+2/B1
B2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Zero-phase
Reactor
Output AC
Line Reactor
Motor
Explanations
Please follow the specific power
supply requirements shown in
Appendix A.
Used to improve the input power
factor, to reduce harmonics and
provide protection from AC line
disturbances (surges, switching
spikes, short interruptions, etc.). AC
Input AC
Line Reactor line reactor should be installed when
the power supply capacity is 500kVA
(Optional)
or more or advanced capacity is
activated .The wiring distance should
be ≤ 10m. Refer to appendix B for
details.
Zero phase reactors are used to
reduce radio noise especially when
Zero-phase
audio equipment is installed near the
Reactor
inverter. Effective for noise reduction
(Ferrite Core
on both the input and output sides.
Common
Attenuation quality is good for a wide
Choke)
range from AM band to 10MHz.
(Optional)
Appendix B specifies the zero phase
reactor. (RF220X00A)
EMI filter
(Optional)
To reduce electromagnetic
interference, please refer to Appendix
B for more details.
Brake
Resistor
(Optional)
Used to reduce the deceleration time
of the motor. Please refer to the chart
in Appendix B for specific brake
resistors.
Motor surge voltage amplitude
Output AC
depends on motor cable length. For
Line Reactor applications with long motor cable
(Optional)
(>20m), it is necessary to install a
reactor at the inverter output side.
2-20
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
2.4.3 Main Terminals Connections
Terminal Symbol
Explanation of Terminal Function
R, S, T
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
AC line input terminals (3-phase)
U, V, W
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase
induction motor
P1, P2
+1, +2
P-B, P2/B1-B2
+2/B1, B2
P2-N, P2/B1-N [+2-(-),+2/B1-(-)]
Connections for DC reactor (optional).
Please remove the jumper before connecting DC reactor.
Models of 15kW and above have a built-in DC reactor.
Connections for brake resistor (optional)
Connections for external brake unit (VFDB series)
Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.
Mains power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
„ Connect these terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) via a non-fuse breaker or earth leakage breaker
to 3-phase AC power for circuit protection. It is unnecessary to consider phase-sequence.
„ It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor (MC) in the power input wiring to cut off
power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor
drives. Both ends of the MC should have an R-C surge absorber.
„ Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF. Run/stop AC motor drives
by RUN/STOP command via control terminals or keypad. If you still need to run/stop AC
drives by turning power ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per hour.
„ Do NOT connect 3-phase models to a 1-phase power source.
Control circuit terminals (U, V, W)
„ When the AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to the motor
terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, respectively, the motor will rotate counterclockwise (as
viewed on the shaft end of the motor) when a forward operation command is received. To
permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation, switch over any of the two motor leads.
Forward
running
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-21
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
„ DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output terminals
of AC motor drives.
„ With long motor cables, high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over-current, high
leakage current or lower current readout accuracy. To prevent this, the motor cable should
be less than 20m for 3.7kW models and below. And the cable should be less than 50m for
5.5kW models and above. For longer motor cables use an AC output reactor.
„ Use a well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.
Terminals [+1, +2] for connecting DC reactor
DC reactor
Jumper
+1
„ To improve the power factor and reduce harmonics, connect a DC reactor between terminals
[+1, +2]. Please remove the jumper before connecting the DC reactor.
NOTE Models of 15kW and above have a built-in DC reactor.
Terminals [+2/B1, B2] for connecting brake resistor and terminals [+2, -] for connecting
external brake unit
VFDB
BR
BR
B2 -(minus sign)
„ Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent deceleration ramps, short
deceleration time, too low brake torque or requiring increased brake torque.
„ If the AC motor drive has a built-in brake chopper (all models of 15kW and below), connect
the external brake resistor to the terminals [+2/B1, B2].
„ Models of 15kW and above don’t have a built-in brake chopper. Please connect an external
optional brake unit (VFDB series) and brake resistor. Refer to VFDB series user manual for
details.
„ When not used, please leave the terminals [+2/B1, -] open.
WARNING!
Short-circuiting [B2] or [-] to [+2/B1] can damage the AC motor drive.
2-22
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Grounding terminals (
)
„ Make sure that the leads are connected correctly and the AC drive is properly grounded.
(Ground resistance for 460V series models should not exceed 10Ω.)
„ Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible.
„ Multiple VFD-BW units can be installed in one location. All the units should be grounded
directly to a common ground terminal, as shown in the figure below. Ensure there are no
ground loops.
excellent
good
not allowed
2.4.4 Control Terminals
SINK Mode
+24
SOURCE Mode
DCM
Multi-function
Input Terminal
Multi-function
Input Terminal
DCM
Internal Circuit
+24V
Internal Circuit
Terminal symbols and functions
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Function
Factory Settings (SINK mode)
ON: Connect to DCM
FWD
Forward-Stop command
FWD-DCM:
ON: Run in FWD direction
OFF: Stop according to stop method
REV
Reverse-Stop command
REV-DCM:
ON: Run in REV direction
OFF: Stop according to stop method
JOG
Jog command
JOG-DCM:
ON: JOG operation
OFF: Stop according to stop method
External fault
EF-DCM:
ON: External Fault. Display “EF” and stop
according to stop method.
OFF: No fault
EF
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-23
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Function
TRG
External counter input
MI1
Multi-function Input 1
MI2
Multi-function Input 2
MI3
Multi-function Input 3
MI4
Multi-function Input 4
MI5
Multi-function Input 5
MI6
Multi-function Input 6
TRG-DCM:
ON: At every pulse counter is advanced by 1.
Refer to Pr.04-04 to Pr.04-09 for programming
the Multi-function Inputs.
ON: the activation current is 16mA.
OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10μA.
Digital Frequency Meter
DFM-DCM
Max: 48V
50mA
50%
DFM
Internal Circuit
Factory Settings (SINK mode)
ON: Connect to DCM
100%
Pulse voltage output monitor signal,
proportional to output frequency
Duty-cycle: 50%
Ratio: Pr.03-07
Min. load: 10Kohm
Max. current: 50mA
Max. voltage: 48VDC
+24V
DC Voltage Source
+24V 20mA
used for SOURCE mode.
DCM
Digital Signal Common
Common for digital inputs and used for SINK
mode.
RA
Multi-function Relay Output (N.O.) a
RB
Multi-function Relay Output (N.C.) b
RC
Multi-function Relay Common
MO1
Multi-function Output 1
(Photocoupler)
MO2
Multi-function Output 2
(Photocoupler)
Resistive Load:
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 240VAC
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 24VDC
Inductive Load:
1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 240VAC
1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 24VDC
Refer to Pr.03-00 for programming.
AC motor drive outputs various monitor signals
by open collector, such as AC drive operational,
master frequency attained, overload indication
and so on. Refer to Pr.03-01 to Pr.03-03 for
programming.
Max: 48Vdc
50mA
MO1~MO3-DCM
MO3
Multi-function Output 3
(Photocoupler)
MO1
~
MO3
MCM
Internal Circuit
MCM
2-24
Multi-function Output Common
Common for Multi-function Outputs
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Terminal
Symbol
+10V
Terminal Function
Potentiometer Power Supply
Factory Settings (SINK mode)
ON: Connect to DCM
+10Vdc 20mA
(Potentiometer: 3~5KΩ)
Analog Voltage Input
+10V
AVI
AVI Circuit
AVI
ACM
Impedance: 47kΩ
Resolution: 10 bits
Range: 0 ~ 10VDC =
0~ Max. Output Frequency (Pr.01-00)
Selection: Pr.02-00, Pr.02-13, Pr.10-00
Parameter setting: Pr.04-00 ~ Pr.04-03
Internal Circuit
Analog Current Input
ACI
ACI Circuit
ACM
Internal Circuit
ACI
Auxiliary Analog Voltage Input
+10
~
-10V
AUI
AUI Circuit
AUI
ACM
Internal Circuit
Analog Output Meter
ACM Circuit
AFM
AFM
0~10V
Potentiometer
Max. 2mA
Internal Circuit ACM
ACM
Analog Control Signal Common
Impedance: 250Ω
Resolution: 10 bits
Range: 4 ~ 20mA =
0~ Max. Output Frequency (Pr.01-00)
Selection: Pr.02-00, Pr.02-13, Pr.10-00
Parameter setting: Pr.04-11 ~ Pr.04-14
Impedance: 47kΩ
Resolution: 10 bits
Range: -10 ~ +10VDC =
0~ Max. Output Frequency (Pr.01-00)
Selection: Pr.02-00, Pr.02-13, Pr.10-00
Parameter setting: Pr.04-15 ~ Pr.04-18
0 to 10V, 2mA
Impedance: 470Ω
Output current: 2mA max
Resolution: 8 bits
Range: 0 ~ 10VDC
Parameter setting: Pr.03-05
Common for AVI, ACI, AUI, AFM
* Control signal wiring size: 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) with shielded wire.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-25
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
Analog input terminals (AVI, ACI, AUI, ACM)
„ Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it as
short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting the
shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement.
„ If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect a
capacitor and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagrams:
AVI/ACI/AUI
C
ACM
ferrite core
wind each wire 3 times or more around the core
Digital inputs (FWD, REV, JOG, EF, TRG, MI1~MI6, DCM)
„ When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs, please use high quality
components to avoid contact bounce.
Digital outputs (MO1, MO2, MO3, MCM)
„ Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity, see wiring diagrams.
„ When connecting a relay to the digital outputs, connect a surge absorber or fly-back diode
across the coil and check the polarity.
General
„ Keep control wiring as far away as possible from the power wiring and in separate conduits
to avoid interference. If necessary let them cross only at 90º angle.
„ The AC motor drive control wiring should be properly installed and not touch any live power
wiring or terminals.
NOTE
„ If a filter is required for reducing EMI (Electro Magnetic Interference), install it as close as
possible to AC drive. EMI can also be reduced by lowering the Carrier Frequency.
„ When using a general GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a current sensor with
sensitivity of 200mA or above, and not less than 0.1-second detection time to avoid nuisance
tripping. For the specific GFCI of the AC motor drive, please select a current sensor with
sensitivity of 30mA or above.
DANGER!
Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment
if it comes in contact with high voltage.
2-26
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
2.4.5 Specifications for Power Terminals and Control Terminals
VFD007B43W, VFD015B43W, VFD022B43W
S
T
R
/L1 /L2 /L3
+1
+2
/B1
B2
V
U
W
/T1 / T2 /T3
Control Terminal
Torque: 4Kgf-cm (3 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 12-24 AWG(3.3-0.2mm2)
Power Terminal
Torque: 18 kgf-cm (15.6 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: stranded wire: 10-18 AWG(5.3-0.8mm2); solid wire: 12-18 AWG(3.3-0.8mm2)
Wire Type: Copper only, 75℃
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-27
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
VFD037B43W
+1 +2 B1 -
B2
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Screw Torque :
18Kgf-cm
Wire Gauge :
18~10AWG
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Control Terminal
Torque: 4Kgf-cm (3 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 12-24 AWG(3.3-0.2mm2)
Power Terminal
Torque: 18 kgf-cm (15.6 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 10-18 AWG(5.3-0.8mm2)
Wire Type: Stranded Copper only, 75℃
2-28
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
VFD055B43W, VFD075B43W, VFD110B43W
POWER
IM
3
MOTOR
Control Terminal
Torque: 4Kgf-cm (3 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 12-24 AWG(3.3-0.2mm2)
Power Terminal
Torque: 30Kgf-cm (26 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 8-12 AWG(8.4-3.3mm2)
Wire Type: Stranded Copper only, 75℃
NOTE
If wiring of the terminal utilizes the wire with a diameter of 6AWG.(13.3mm2), it is thus necessary
to use the Recognized Ring Terminal to conduct a proper wiring.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-29
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
VFD150B43W, VFD185B43W, VFD220B43W
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 +1
POWER
+2
DC (+)
-
DC ( - )
V/T2 W/T3
IM
3
MOTOR
Control Terminal
Torque: 4Kgf-cm (3 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 12-24 AWG (3.3-0.2mm2)
Power Terminal
Torque: 30Kgf-cm (26 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 2-8 AWG(33.3-8.4mm2)
NOTE
If wiring of the terminal utilizes the wire with a diameter of 6AWG.(13.3mm2), it is thus necessary
to use the Recognized Ring Terminal to conduct a proper wiring.
2-30
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
VFD300B43W, VFD370B43W, VFD450B43W
POWER
ALARM
CHARGE
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
POWER
+1
+2
-
U/T1 V/T2 2/T3
IM
3
MOTOR
Control Terminal
Torque: 4Kgf-cm (3 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 12-24 AWG(3.3-0.2mm2)
Power Terminal
Torque: 58.7 kgf-cm (50.9 in-lbf) max.
Wire Gauge: 2-4 AWG(33.6-21.2mm2)
Wire Type: Stranded Copper only, 75° C
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-31
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
VFD550B43W, VFD750B43W
POWER
ALARM
CHARGE
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
+1
POWER
+2
Screw Torque:
200kgf-cm (173in-lbf)
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
IM
3
MOTOR
Control Terminal
Torque: 4Kgf-cm (3 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 12-24 AWG (3.3-0.2mm2)
Power Terminal
Torque: 200kgf-cm (173 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 1~3 AWG (42.4-85mm2)
Wire Type: Stranded Copper only, 75° C
2-32
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
VFD900B43W, VFD1100B43W, VFD1320B43W
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
POWER
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
+1 +2
IM
DC(+) DC(-)
MOTOR
3
UNIT:mm
Control Terminal
Torque: 4Kgf-cm (3 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 12-24 AWG
Power Terminal
Torque: 300kgf-cm (260 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 1/0 AWG*2-300 MCM*2
Wire Type: Stranded Copper only, 75°C
NOTE
When wiring , it needs additional terminal as the figure above shows.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
2-33
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|VFD-BW Series
VFD1600B43W, VFD1850B43W
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
POWER
+
-
DC (+) DC(-)
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Control Terminal
Torque: 4Kgf-cm (3 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 12-24 AWG
Power Terminal
Torque: 408kgf-cm (354 in-lbf)
Wire Gauge: 500 MCM (max)
Wire Type: Stranded Copper only, 75°C
NOTE
It needs the additional terminal above when wiring, and add insulation sheath on position where
the figure above shows.
2-34
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 3 Start Up
3.1 Preparations before Start-up
Carefully check the following items before proceeding.
„ Make sure that the wiring is correct. In particular, check that the output terminals U, V, W.
are NOT connected to power and that the drive is well grounded.
„ Verify that there are no short-circuits between terminals and from terminals to ground or
mains power.
„ Check for loose terminals, connectors or screws.
„ Verify that no other equipment is connected to the AC motor
„ Make sure that all switches are OFF before applying power to ensure that the AC motor
drive doesn’t start running and there is no abnormal operation after applying power.
„ Make sure that the front cover is correctly installed before applying power.
„ Do NOT operate the AC motor drive with humid hands.
„ Check the following items after applying power:
- The keypad should light up as follows (normal status with no error)
F
H
U
VFD-PU01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV
JOG
RUN
When power is ON, LEDs "F", "STOP" and
"FWD" should light up. The display will
show "60.00" with the least signification "0"
flashing.
STOP
RESET
„
„ - If the drive has built-in fan (2.2kW and above) it should run. The factory setting of Fan
Control Pr.03-12=00 (Fan always on).
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
3-1
Chapter 3 Start Up|VFD-BW Series
3.2 Operation Method
Refer to 4.2 How to operate the digital keypad VFD-PU01 and chapter 5 parameters for setting.
Please choose a suitable method depending on application and operation rule. The operation is
usually used as shown in the following table.
Operation Method
Frequency Source
Operation Command Source
RUN
PU01 keypad
MI1
Operate from
external signal
MI2
Parameter
setting:
04-04=11
DCM
04-05=12
STOP
RESET
External terminals input:
FWD-DCM
REV-DCM
AVI, ACI, AUI
3.3 Trial Run
After finishing checking the items in “3.1 preparation before start-up”, you can perform a trial run.
The factory setting of the operation source is from the keypad (Pr.02-01=00).
1.
After applying power, verify that LED “F” is on and the display shows 60.00Hz.
2.
Setting frequency to about 5Hz by using
key.
3. Pressing RUN key for forward running. And if you want to change to reverse running,
you should press
please press
4.
STOP
RESET
key in
F
H
U
page. And if you want to decelerate to stop,
key.
Check following items:
„
Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct.
„
Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration.
„
Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth.
„
If the results of trial run are normal, please start the formal run.
3-2
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 3 Start Up|VFD-BW Series
NOTE
1.
Stop running immediately if any fault occurs and refer to the troubleshooting guide for solving
the problem.
2.
Do NOT touch output terminals U, V, W when power is still applied to L1/R, L2/S, L3/T even
when the AC motor drive has stopped. The DC-link capacitors may still be charged to
hazardous voltage levels, even if the power has been turned off.
3.
To avoid damage to components, do not touch them or the circuit boards with metal objects or
your bare hands.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
3-3
Chapter 3 Start Up|VFD-BW Series
This page intentionally left blank.
3-4
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 4 Digital Keypad Operation
4.1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD-PU01
LED Display
Display frequency, current, voltage
and error, etc.
F
H
U
VFD-PU01
Status Display
Display of drive status
JOG
Jog operation selector
Left key
Moves cursor to the left
Part Number
MODE
Display mode selector
JOG
UP and DOWN Key
Sets the parameter
number and changes the
numerical data, such as
Master Frequency.
STOP/RESET
RUN
Display Message
STOP
RESET
RUN key
Descriptions
Displays the AC drive Master Frequency.
Displays the actual output frequency present at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3.
User defined unit (where U = F x Pr.00-05)
Displays the output current present at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
Displays the AC motor drive forward run status.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
4-1
Chapter 4 Digital Keypad Operation|VFD-BW Series
Display Message
Descriptions
Displays the AC motor drive reverse run status.
The counter value (C).
Displays the selected parameter.
Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter.
External Fault.
Display “End” for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted by
key. After a parameter value has been set, the new
pressing
value is automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the
,
and
keys.
Display “Err”, if the input is invalid.
4-2
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 4 Digital Keypad Operation|VFD-BW Series
4.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad VFD-PU01
Selection mode
START
F
F
F
H
U
F
H
H
H
U
U
U
MODE
MODE
F
H
U
MODE
MODE
MODE
GO STAR T
NO TE : In the selection mode, press
to set the parameters.
To set parameters
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
H
U
param eter set successfully
F
H
U
F
H
U
parameter set error
MODE
m ove to previous display
NO TE : In the parameter setting mode, you can press
MODE
to return to the selection mode.
To shift cursor
START
F
F
F
F
F
F
H
U
F
H
U
H
U
H
U
H
U
F
H
U
F
H
U
To modify data
F
START
H
U
H
U
H
U
To set dir ection
F
H
U
or
or
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
4-3
Chapter 4 Digital Keypad Operation|VFD-BW Series
This page intentionally left blank.
4-4
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters
The VFD-BW parameters are divided into 12 groups by property for easy setting. In most applications,
the user can finish all parameter settings before start-up without the need for re-adjustment during
operation.
The 12 groups are as follows:
Group 00: User Parameters
Group 01: Basic Parameters
Group 02: Operation Method Parameters
Group 03: Output Function Parameters
Group 04: Input Function Parameters
Group 05: Multi-Step Speed and PLC Parameters
Group 06: Protection Parameters
Group 07: Motor Parameters
Group 08: Special Parameters
Group 09: Communication Parameters
Group 10: PID Control Parameters
Group 11: Fan & Pump Control Parameters
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-1
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
5.1 Summary of Parameter Settings
: This parameter can be set during operation.
★: This parameter can be memorized only when LV or fault occurs.
Group 00 User Parameters
Parameter
Explanation
00-00
Identity Code of the
AC Motor Drive
Rated Current Display
of the AC Motor Drive
Parameter Reset
00-01
00-02
5-2
00-03
Start-up Display
Selection
00-04
Content of Multi
Function Display
00-05
User-Defined
Coefficient K
Settings
460V: 05~43
(Display according to the model)
Display according to the model
08: Keypad lock
09: All parameters are reset to factory
settings (50Hz, 220V/380V)
10: All parameters are reset to factory
settings (60Hz, 220V/440V)
00: Display the frequency command value
(LED F)
01: Display the actual output frequency
(LED H)
02: Display the content of user-defined
unit (LED U)
03: Multifunction display, see Pr.00-04
04: FWD / REV command
00: Display output current (A)
01: Display counter value (c)
02: Display process operation (1. tt)
03: Display DC-BUS voltage (U)
04: Display output voltage (E)
05: Display power factor angle (n.)
06: Display output power (P)
07: Display the actual motor speed in rpm
(enabled in vector control mode or PG
(Encoder) feedback control) (LED H
and LED U)
08: Display the estimated value of torque
as it relates to current (t)
09: Display PG numbers/10ms (G)
10: Display analog feedback signal value
(b)
11: Display AVI (%) (U1.)
12: Display ACI (%) (U2.)
13: Display AUI (%) (U3.)
14: Display the temperature of heat sink
(t.) (℃)
0.01~160.00
Factory
Customer
Setting
Read
Only
Read
Only
00
00
00
1.00
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
00-06
Software Version
Read Only
00-07
Password Input
00-08
Password Set
00-09
Control Method
00~65535
00~02: Times of wrong password
00~65535
00: No password set or successful input in
Pr. 00-07
01: Password has been set
00: V/f control
01: V/f +PG control
02: Vector control
03: Vector +PG control
00-10
Reserved
Factory
Customer
Setting
Read
Only
00
00
00
Group 01 Basic Parameters
Parameter
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
01-04
01-05
01-06
Explanation
Maximum Output
Frequency (Fmax)
Maximum Voltage
Frequency (Fbase)
Maximum Output
Voltage (Vmax)
Mid-Point Frequency
(Fmid)
Mid-Point Voltage
(Vmid)
Minimum Output
Frequency (Fmin)
Minimum Output
Voltage (Vmin)
01-07
Settings
50.00~400.00 Hz
Factory
Customer
Setting
60.00
0.10~400.00 Hz
60.00
230V series: 0.1V~255.0V
460V series: 0.1V~510.0V
0.10~400.00 Hz
220.0
440.0
0.50
230V series: 0.1V~255.0V
460V series: 0.1V~510.0V
0.10~400.00 Hz
1.7
3.4
0.50
230V series: 0.1V~255.0V
460V series: 0.1V~510.0V
01~120 %
1.7
3.4
100
Output Frequency
Upper Limit
01-08
Output Frequency
00~100 %
00
Lower Limit
01-09 Accel Time 1
0.01~3600.0 sec
10.0
01-10 Decel Time 1
0.01~3600.0 sec
10.0
01-11 Accel Time 2
0.01~3600.0 sec
10.0
01-12 Decel Time 2
0.01~3600.0 sec
10.0
Pr.01-09 ~ 01-12: Factory setting for models of 30hp (22kW) and above is 60sec.
01-13 Jog Acceleration Time 0.1~3600.0 sec
1.0
01-14 Jog Frequency
0.10~400.00 Hz
6.00
01-15 Auto acceleration /
00: Linear Accel/Decel
00
deceleration (refer to
01: Auto Accel, Linear Decel
Accel/Decel time
02: Linear Accel, Auto Decel
setting)
03: Auto Accel/Decel (Set by load)
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-3
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
Explanation
Factory
Customer
Setting
Settings
04: Auto Accel/Decel (set by Accel/Decel
Time setting)
01-16
Acceleration S-Curve 00~07
00
01-17
Deceleration S-Curve 00~07
00
01-18 Accel Time 3
0.01~3600.0 sec
10.0
01-19 Decel Time 3
0.01~3600.0 sec
10.0
01-20 Accel Time 4
0.01~3600.0 sec
10.0
01-21 Decel Time 4
0.01~3600.0 sec
10.0
Pr.01-18 ~ 01-21: Factory setting for models of 30hp (22kW) and above is 60sec.
01-22 Jog Deceleration Time 0.1~3600.0 sec
1.0
01-23
Accel/Decel Time Unit 00: Unit: 1 sec
01
01: Unit: 0.1 sec
02: Unit: 0.01 sec
Group 02 Operation Method Parameters
Parameter
02-00
02-01
02-02
02-03
Explanation
Settings
Source of First Master 00: Digital keypad (PU01)
Frequency Command 01: 0~+10V from AVI
02: 4~20mA from ACI
03: -10~+10V from AUI
04: RS485 serial communication
(Last used frequency saved.)
05: RS485 serial communication
(Last used frequency not saved.)
06: Combined use of master and auxiliary
frequency command
(See Pr.02-10~02-12)
Source of First
00: Digital keypad (PU01)
Operation Command 01: External terminals.
Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.
02: External terminals.
Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.
03: RS-485 serial communication.
Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.
04: RS-485 serial communication.
Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.
Stop Method
00: STOP: ramp to stop; E.F.: coast to stop
01: STOP: coast to stop; E.F.: coast to stop
02: STOP: ramp to stop; E.F.: ramp to stop
03: STOP: coast to stop; E.F.: ramp to stop
PWM Carrier
230V
1-5HP:01~15kHz
Frequency Selections (for VFD-B
7.5-25HP:01~15kHz
series)
30-50HP:01~09kHz
75-100HP:01~6kHz
5-4
Factory
Customer
Setting
00
00
00
15
09
06
06
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
460V
02-04
Motor Direction
Control
02-05
2-wire/3-wire
Operation Control
Modes
02-06
Line Start Lockout
02-07
Loss of ACI Signal
1-5HP:01~15kHz
7.5-25HP:01~15kHz
09
30-60HP:01~9kHz
06
75-250HP:01~6kHz
00: Enable forward/reverse operation
01: Disable reverse operation
02: Disable forward operation
00: 2-wire: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
01: 2-wire: FWD/REV, RUN/STOP
02: 3-wire operation
00: Disable. Operation status is not
changed even if operation command
source Pr.02-01 and/or Pr.02-14 is
changed.
01: Enable. Operation status is not
changed even if operation command
source Pr.02-01 and/or Pr.02-14 is
changed.
02: Disable. Operation status will change if
operation command source Pr.02-01
and/or Pr.02-14 is changed.
03: Enable. Operation status will change if
operation command source Pr.02-01
and/or Pr.02-14 is changed.
00: Decelerate to 0Hz
01: Coast to stop and display “EF”
02: Continue operation by last frequency
command
00: Based on accel/decel time
01: Based on constant speed (according to
Pr.02-09)
02: Based on accel/decel time, but
frequency command will be 0 when
stopped (only for frequency command
from digital keypad PU01)
0.01~1.00Hz/ms
02-08
Up/Down Mode
02-09
Accel/Decel Rate of
Change of UP/DOWN
Operation with
Constant Speed
Source of the Master 00: Digital keypad (PU01)
Frequency Command 01: 0~10V from AVI
02: 4~20mA from ACI
03: -10~10V from AUI
04: RS-485 serial communication
Source of the
00: Digital keypad (PU01)
Auxiliary Frequency
01: 0~10V from AVI
Command
02: 4~20mA from ACI
03: -10~10V from AUI
02-10
02-11
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Factory
Customer
Setting
15
06
00
00
00
00
00
0.01
00
00
5-5
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
02-12
02-13
Explanation
Combination of the
Master and Auxiliary
Frequency Command
Source of Second
Frequency Command
02-14
Source of Second
Operation Command
02-15
Keypad Frequency
Command
Factory
Customer
Setting
Settings
04: RS-485 serial communication
00: Master frequency + auxiliary frequency
01: Master frequency - auxiliary frequency
00: Digital keypad (PU01)
01: 0~+10V from AVI
02: 4~20mA from ACI
03: -10~+10V from AUI
04: RS-485 serial communication
(Last used frequency saved)
05: RS-485 serial communication
(Last used frequency not saved)
06: Combined use of master and auxiliary
frequency command
(See Pr.02-10 ~ 02-12)
00: Digital keypad (PU01)
01: External terminals.
Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.
02: External terminals.
Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.
03: RS-485 serial communication.
Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.
04: RS-485 serial communication.
Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.
0.00~400.00Hz
00
00
00
60.00
Group 03 Output Function Parameters
Parameter
Explanation
03-00
Multi-Function Output
Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1)
Multi-Function Output
Terminal MO1
Multi-Function Output
Terminal MO2
Multi-Function Output
Terminal MO3
03-01
03-02
03-03
5-6
Settings
00: No function
01: AC drive operational
02: Master frequency attained
03: Zero speed
04: Over torque detection
05: Base-Block (B.B.) indication
06: Low-voltage indication
07: Operation mode indication
08: Fault indication
09: Desired frequency attained 1
10: PLC program running
11: PLC program step completed
12: PLC program completed
13: PLC program operation paused
14: Terminal count value attained
15: Preliminary count value attained
16: Auxiliary motor No.1
Factory
Customer
Setting
08
01
02
20
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
03-04
03-05
03-06
03-07
03-08
03-09
03-10
03-11
03-12
Explanation
Desired Frequency
Attained 1
Analog Output Signal
Analog Output Gain
Digital Output
Multiplying Factor
Terminal Count Value
Preliminary Count
Value
Desired Frequency
Attained 2
EF Active When
Preliminary Count
Value Attained
Fan Control
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Settings
17: Auxiliary motor No.2
18: Auxiliary motor No.3
19: Heat sink overheat warning
20: AC motor drive ready
21: Emergency stop indication
22: Desired frequency attained 2
23: Software brake signal
24: Zero speed output signal
25: Low-current detection
26: Operation indication (H>=Fmin)
27: Feedback signal error
28: User-defined low-voltage detection
29: Mechanical brake control (Desired
frequency attained 3) (See Pr.03-13,
Pr.03-14)
30: Motor’s temperature warning
31: Motor overheat
32: Full reel diameter attained
33: Empty reel diameter attained
34: Broken line detection
35: Mechanical brake at stop
(See Pr.03-14, Pr.03-15)
36: Error PID feedback of tension
0.00~400.00 Hz
Factory
Customer
Setting
0.00
00: Analog frequency meter
01: Analog current meter
02: Output voltage
03: Output frequency command
04: Output motor speed
05: Load power factor
01~200%
0.1~100.0
100
1.0
00~65500
00~65500
00
00
0.00~400.00Hz
00: Preliminary count value attained, no
EF display
01: Preliminary count value attained, EF
active
00: Fan always ON
01: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops,
fan will be OFF
02: AC motor drive runs and fan ON, AC
motor drive stops and fan OFF
00
0.00
00
00
5-7
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
03-13
03-14
03-15
Explanation
Mechanical Brake
Release Frequency
Mechanical Brake
Engage Frequency
Mechanical Brake
Engage Time at Stop
Factory
Customer
Setting
Settings
03: Fan ON to run when preliminary
heatsink temperature attained
0.00~400.00Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00Hz
0.00
0.0~600.0 sec
5.0
Group 04 Input Function Parameters
Parameter
04-00
04-01
04-02
04-03
04-04
04-05
04-06
04-07
04-08
04-09
5-8
Explanation
Settings
AVI Analog Input Bias 0.00~200.00%
AVI Bias Polarity
00: Positive bias
01: Negative bias
AVI Input Gain
1~200 %
AVI Negative Bias,
00: No AVI negative bias command
Reverse Motion
01: Negative bias: REV motion enabled
Enable/Disable
02: Negative bias: REV motion disabled
(Motion direction is controlled by digital
keypad or external terminals.)
Multi-Function Input
00: No function
Terminal 1 (MI1)
01: Multi-Step speed command 1
Multi-Function Input
02: Multi-Step speed command 2
Terminal 2 (MI2)
03: Multi-Step speed command 3
Multi-Function Input
04: Multi-Step speed command 4
Terminal 3 (MI3)
05: External reset (N.O.)
06: Accel/Decel inhibit
Multi-Function Input
Terminal 4 (MI4)
07: Accel/Decel time selection command 1
for Accel/Decel time 1/2
Multi-Function Input
08: Accel/Decel time selection command 2
Terminal 5 (MI5)
for Accel/Decel time 3/4
Multi-Function Input
09: External base block (N.O.)
Terminal 6 (MI6)
10: External base block (N.C.)
11: Up: Increment master frequency
12: Down: Decrement master frequency
13: Counter reset
14: Run PLC program
15: Pause PLC program
16: Auxiliary motor No.1 output disable
17: Auxiliary motor No.2 output disable
18: Auxiliary motor No.3 output disable
19: Emergency stop (N.O.)
20: Emergency stop (N.C.)
21: Master frequency selection AVI/ACI
ON: ACI; OFF: AVI
22: Master frequency selection AVI/AUI
ON: AUI; OFF: AVI
Factory
Customer
Setting
0.00
00
100
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
04-10
04-11
04-12
04-13
04-14
04-15
04-16
04-17
04-18
04-19
04-20
Explanation
Settings
23: Operation command selection
ON: Operation command via external
terminals
OFF: Operation command via keypad
PU01
24: Auto accel/decel mode disable
25: Forced stop (N.C.)
26: Forced stop (N.O.)
27: Parameter lock enable (N.C.)
28: PID function disabled
29: Jog FWD/REV command
30: External reset (N.C.)
31: Source of second frequency command
enabled
32: Source of second operation command
enabled
33: One shot PLC
34: Proximity sensor input for simple Index
function
35: Output shutoff stop (N.O.)
36: Output shutoff stop (N.C.)
37: Initial reel diameter selection 0 (N.O.)
38: Initial reel diameter selection 1 (N.O.)
39: Initial reel diameter command (N.O.)
40: Clear PID control integration of tension
(N.O.)
01~20 (*2 msec)
Digital Terminal Input
Debouncing Time
ACI Analog Input Bias 0.00~200.00%
ACI Bias Polarity
00: Positive bias
01: Negative bias
ACI Input Gain
01~200 %
ACI Negative Bias,
00: No ACI negative bias command
Reverse Motion
01: Negative bias: REV motion enabled
Enable/Disable
02: Negative bias: REV motion disabled
(Motion direction is controlled by digital
keypad or external terminals.)
AUI Analog Input Bias 0.00~200.00%
AUI Bias Polarity
00: Positive bias
01: Negative bias
AUI Input Gain
01~200 %
AUI Negative Bias
00: No AUI negative bias command
Reverse Motion
01: Negative bias: REV motion enabled
Enable/Disable
02: Negative bias: REV motion disabled
(Motion direction is controlled by digital
keypad or external terminals.)
AVI Analog Input
0.00~10.00 sec
Delay
ACI Analog Input
0.00~10.00 sec
Delay
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Factory
Customer
Setting
01
0.00
00
100
00
0.00
00
100
00
0.05
0.05
5-9
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
Explanation
04-21
AUI Analog Input
Delay
Analog Input
Frequency Resolution
Gear Ratio for Simple
Index Function
Index Angle for
Simple Index Function
Deceleration Time for
Simple Index Function
04-22
04-23
04-24
04-25
Factory
Customer
Setting
0.05
Settings
0.00~10.00 sec
00: 0.01Hz
01: 0.1Hz
4~1000
01
200
0.0~360.0∘
180.0
0.00~100.00
0.00
Group 05 Multi-Step Speed and PLC Parameters
Parameter
05-00
05-01
05-02
05-03
05-04
05-05
05-06
05-07
05-08
05-09
05-10
05-11
05-12
05-13
05-14
05-15
5-10
Explanation
1st Step Speed
Frequency
2nd Step Speed
Frequency
3rd Step Speed
Frequency
4th Step Speed
Frequency
5th Step Speed
Frequency
6th Step Speed
Frequency
7th Step Speed
Frequency
8th Step Speed
Frequency
9th Step Speed
Frequency
10th Step Speed
Frequency
11th Step Speed
Frequency
12th Step Speed
Frequency
13th Step Speed
Frequency
14th Step Speed
Frequency
15th Step Speed
Frequency
PLC Mode
Factory
Customer
Setting
0.00
Settings
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
00: Disable PLC operation
01: Execute one program cycle
02: Continuously execute program cycles
03: Execute one program cycle step by step
00
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
05-16
05-17
05-18
05-19
05-20
05-21
05-22
05-23
05-24
05-25
05-26
05-27
05-28
05-29
05-30
05-31
05-32
05-33
05-34
Explanation
PLC Forward/
Reverse Motion
Time Duration of 1st
Step Speed
Time Duration of 2nd
Step Speed
Time Duration of 3rd
Step Speed
Time Duration of 4th
Step Speed
Time Duration of 5th
Step Speed
Time Duration of 6th
Step Speed
Time Duration of 7th
Step Speed
Time Duration of 8th
Step Speed
Time Duration of 9th
Step Speed
Time Duration of 10th
Step Speed
Time Duration of 11th
Step Speed
Time Duration of 12th
Step Speed
Time Duration of 13th
Step Speed
Time Duration of 14th
Step Speed
Time Duration of 15th
Step Speed
Time Unit Settings
The Amplitude of
Wobble Vibration
Wobble Skip
Frequency
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Settings
Factory
Customer
Setting
04: Continuously execute program cycles
step by step
00~32767 (00: FWD; 01: REV)
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00~65500 sec or 00~6550.0 sec
00
00: 1 sec
01: 0.1 sec
0.00~400.00Hz
00
0.00
0.00~400.00Hz
0.00
5-11
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Group 06 Protection Parameters
Parameter
06-00
06-01
06-02
06-03
06-04
06-05
06-06
06-07
06-08
06-09
06-10
06-11
5-12
Explanation
Over-Voltage Stall
Prevention
Factory
Customer
Setting
Settings
00: Disable over-voltage stall prevention
230V: 330~410V (for VFD-B series)
460V: 660~820V
20~250%
Over-Current Stall
Prevention during
Accel
Over-Current Stall
20~250%
Prevention during
Operation
Over-Torque
00: Disabled
Detection Mode (OL2) 01: Enabled during constant speed
operation. After the over-torque is
detected, keep running until OL1 or OL
occurs.
02: Enabled during constant speed
operation. After the over-torque is
detected, stop running.
03: Enabled during accel. After the overtorque is detected, keep running until
OL1 or OL occurs.
04: Enabled during accel. After the overtorque is detected, stop running.
Over-Torque
10~200%
Detection Level
Over-Torque
0.1~60.0 sec
Detection Time
Electronic Thermal
00: Standard motor (self cooled by fan)
Overload Relay
01: Special motor (forced external cooling)
Selection
02: Disabled
Electronic Thermal
30~600 sec
Characteristic
Present Fault Record 00: No fault
Second Most Recent 01: Over current (oc)
Fault Record
02: Over voltage (ov)
Third Most Recent
03: Over heat (oH)
Fault Record
04: Overload (oL)
Fourth Most Recent
05: Electronic thermal relay (oL1)
Fault Record
06: External fault (EF)
07: IGBT protection (occ)
08: CPU failure (cF3)
09: Hardware protection failure (HPF)
10: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
11: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
12: Over-current during steady state
operation (ocn)
13: Ground fault (GFF))
14: Reserved
390V
780V
170
170
00
150
0.1
02
60
00
00
00
00
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
06-12
06-13
06-14
06-15
06-16
06-17
06-18
06-19
06-20
Explanation
Settings
15: EEPROM WRITE failure (cF1)
16: EEPROM READ failure (cF2)
17: Reserved
18: Motor overload (oL2)
19: Auto Acel/Decel failure (CFA)
20: Software/Password protection (codE)
21: External Emergency Stop (EF1)
22: Phase-Loss (PHL)
23: Preliminary count value attained, EF
active (cEF)
24: Low current (Lc)
25: Analog feedback signal error (AnLEr)
26: PG feedback signal error (PGErr)
27: Motor overheat (oH9F)
28: Motor overheat warning (oH9L)
29: Fan Power Fault (FAnP)
30: Fan 1 Fault (FF1)
31: Fan 2 Fault (FF2)
32: Fan 3 Fault (FF3)
33: Fan 1, 2, 3 Fault (FFo)
34: Fan 1, 2 Fault (FF12)
35: Fan 1, 3 Fault (FF13)
36: Fan 2, 3 Fault (FF23)
37: Gate Drive Low Voltage Protect (Fv)
38: Error PID feedback of tension (rFbE)
39: Broken line detection of tension (rLbr)
Low Current Detection 00~100% (00: Disabled)
Level
Low Current Detection 0.1~3600.0 sec
Time
Low Current Detection 00: Warn and keep operating
Mode
01: Warn and ramp to stop
02: Warn and coast to stop
03: Warn, after coast to stop, restart (delay
Pr.06-15 setting time)
Low Current Detection 1~600 minutes
Restart Delay Time
(Lv)
User-Defined Low00: Disabled
Voltage Detection
230V: 220~300VDC (for VFD-B series)
Level
460V: 440~600VDC
User-Defined Low0.1~3600.0 sec
Voltage Detection
Time
Reserved
User-Defined Low00: No action
Voltage Treatment
01: EF active
Reserved
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Factory
Customer
Setting
00
10.0
00
10
00
0.5
5-13
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
06-21
06-22
Explanation
Factory
Customer
Setting
Settings
Reserved
Reserved
Group 07 Motor Parameters
Parameter
Explanation
07-00
Motor Rated Current
30~120%
07-01
Motor No-Load
Current
Torque Compensation
Slip Compensation
Number of Motor
Poles
Motor Parameters
Auto Tuning
01~90%
07-02
07-03
07-04
07-05
07-06
07-07
07-08
07-09
07-10
07-11
07-12
07-13
07-14
07-15
Motor Line-to-line
Resistance R1
Reserved
Motor Rated Slip
Slip Compensation
Limit
Reserved
Reserved
Torque Compensation
Time Constant
Slip Compensation
Time Constant
Accumulative Motor
Operation Time (Min.)
Accumulative Motor
Operation Time (Day)
Factory
Customer
Setting
100
Settings
40
0.0~10.0
0.00~3.00
02~10
0.0
0.00
04
00: Disable
01: Auto tuning R1 (Motor doesn’t run.)
02: Auto Tuning R1 + No-load Test (Motor
runs.)
00~65535mΩ
00
00
0.00~20.00Hz
0~250%
3.00
200
0.01~10.00 sec
0.05
0.05~10.00 sec
0.10
00~1439 minutes
00
00~65535 days
00
Group 08 Special Parameters
Parameter
Explanation
08-00
DC Brake Current
Level
DC Brake Time during
Start-Up
DC Brake Time during
Stopping
Start-Point for DC
Brake during Stopping
08-01
08-02
08-03
5-14
Settings
00~100%
Factory
Customer
Setting
00
0.0~60.0 sec
0.0
0.0~60.0 sec
0.0
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
Explanation
08-04
Momentary Power
Loss Operation
Selection
08-05
08-15
Maximum Allowable
Power Loss Time
B.B. Time for Speed
Search
Current Limit for
Speed Search
Skip Frequency 1
Upper Limit
Skip Frequency 1
Lower Limit
Skip Frequency 2
Upper Limit
Skip Frequency 2
Lower Limit
Skip Frequency 3
Upper Limit
Skip Frequency 3
Lower Limit
Auto Restart Times
After Fault
Auto Energy Saving
08-16
AVR Function
08-17
Software Brake Level
08-18
Base Block Speed
Search
08-19
Speed Search during
Start-up
08-06
08-07
08-08
08-09
08-10
08-11
08-12
08-13
08-14
08-20
08-21
08-22
Speed Search
Frequency during
Start-up
Auto Reset Time at
Restart after Fault
Compensation
Coefficient for Motor
Instability
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Settings
00: Operation stops after momentary
power loss
01: Operation continues after momentary
power loss, speed search starts with
the Master Frequency reference value.
02: Operation continues after momentary
power loss, speed search starts with
the minimum frequency.
0.1~5.0 sec
Factory
Customer
Setting
00
2.0
0.1~5.0 sec
0.5
30~200%
150
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
00~10
00
00: Disable
01: Enable
00: AVR function enable
01: AVR function disable
02: AVR function disable for decel.
230V: 370~430VDC (for VFD-B series)
460V: 740~860VDC
00: Speed search starts with last frequency
command
01: Speed search starts with minimum
output frequency
00: Speed search disable
01: Speed search enable
00: Setting frequency
01: Maximum operation frequency
(Pr.01-00)
00~60000 sec
00
00~1000
00
380
760
00
00
00
600
00
5-15
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Group 09 Communication Parameters
Parameter
09-00
09-01
09-02
09-03
09-04
09-05
09-06
09-07
Explanation
Settings
Communication Address 01~254
Transmission Speed
00: Baud rate 4800
01: Baud rate 9600
02: Baud rate 19200
03: Baud rate 38400
Transmission Fault
00: Warn and keep operating
Treatment
01: Warn and ramp to stop
02: Warn and coast to stop
03: No warning and keep operating
Time-out Detection
0.0: Disable
0.0~60.0 sec
Communication Protocol 00: 7,N,2 for ASCII
01: 7,E,1 for ASCII
02: 7,O,1 for ASCII
03: 8,N,2 for RTU
04: 8,E,1 for RTU
05: 8,O,1 for RTU
Reserved
Reserved
Response Delay Time
00~200 (*2 msec)
Factory
Customer
Setting
01
01
03
0.0
00
00
Group 10 PID Control Parameters
Parameter
10-00
10-01
10-02
10-03
10-04
10-05
10-06
5-16
Explanation
Input terminal for PID
Feedback
Settings
00: Inhibit PID operation: external
terminals AVI, ACI may be used for
frequency command if required
(Pr.02-00).
01: Negative PID feedback from external
terminal (AVI) 0~+10V
02: Negative PID feedback from external
terminal (ACI) 4~20mA
03: Positive PID feedback from external
terminal (AVI) 0~+10V
04: Positive PID feedback from external
terminal (ACI) 4~20mA
Gain over PID Detection 0.00~10.00
value
Proportional Gain (P)
0.0~10.0
Integral Gain (I)
0.00~100.00 sec
Derivative Control (D)
0.00~1.00 sec
Upper Bound for Integral 00~100%
Control
Primary Delay Filter
0.0~2.5 sec
Time
Factory
Customer
Setting
00
1.00
1.0
1.00
0.00
100
0.0
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
Explanation
10-07
10-08
PID Output Freq Limit
Feedback Signal
Detection Time
Treatment of the
Erroneous Feedback
Signals (for PID and PG
feedback error)
PG Pulse Range
PG Input
10-09
10-10
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-20
10-21
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) control (with
PG only) (P)
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) control (with
PG only) (I)
Speed Control Output
Frequency Limit
Sample time for
refreshing the content of
210DH and 210EH
Deviation Range of PID
Feedback Signal Error
Filter Time for PG
Speed Feedback
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Tension Control
Selection
★10-22 Wind Mode
10-23
10-24
10-25
Mechanical Gear Ratio
A (at motor side)
Mechanical Gear Ratio
B (at load side)
Source of Tension PID
Target
★10-26 Tension PID Target
Value
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Settings
0~110%
0.0~3600.0
Factory
Customer
Setting
100
60.0
00: Warn and keep operating
01: Warn and ramp to stop
02: Warn and coast to stop
00
00~40000 (Max=20000 for 2-pole motor)
00: Disable PG
01: Single phase
02: Forward / Counterclockwise rotation
03: Reverse / Clockwise rotation
0.0~10.0
600
00
0.00~100.00 sec
1.00
0.00∼100.00 Hz
10.00
0.01~1.00 sec
0.10
0.00~100.00%
100.00
1.0
0~500 (*2 msec)
0
0: Disable
1: Closed-loop, speed mode
0: Rewind
1: Unwind
1~65535
0
100
1~65535
100
0: Parameter setting
(defined by Pr.10-26)
1: Via analog input AVI
2: Via analog input ACI
3: Via analog input AUI
4: Via RS-485 serial communication
(defined by Pr.10-26)
0.0~100.0%
0
0
50.0
5-17
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
10-27
Explanation
Source of Tension PID
Feedback
Settings
0: Via analog input AVI
1: Via analog input ACI
2: Via analog input AUI
10-28
Auto-tuning Tension PID 0: Disable
1: Reel diameter (Pr.10-29~10-31
corresponds to Pr.10-44, Pr.1032~10-34 corresponds to Pr.10-43)
2: Frequency (Pr.10-29~10-31
corresponds to Pr.01-05, Pr.1032~10-34 corresponds to Pr.01-00)
10-29 Tension PID P1
0.0~1000.0 %
10-30 Tension PID I1
0.00~500.00 sec
10-31 Tension PID D1
0.00~10.00 sec
10-32 Tension PID P2
0.0~1000.0 %
10-33 Tension PID I2
0.00~500.00 sec
10-34 Tension PID D2
0.00~10.00 sec
10-35
Tension PID Feedback
0: Negative PID feedback
Method
1: Positive PID feedback
10-36
Tension PID Output
0.00~100.00% (according to Pr.01-00)
Limit
10-37
Source of Line Speed
0: Disable
Input Command
1: Via analog input AVI
2: Via analog input ACI
3: Via analog input AUI
4: Via RS-485 serial communication
(Pr.10-41)
5: Pulse input
6: DFM-DCM pulse input
10-38
Max. Line Speed
0.0~3000.0 m/min.
10-39
Min. Line Speed
0.0~3000.0 m/min.
10-40
Pulse Number for Each
0.0~3000.0
Meter
★10-41 Current Line Speed
0.0~3000.0 m/min.
10-42
Source of Reel Diameter 0: Calculated by line speed
1: Calculated by integrating thickness
(encoder is on rewind shaft.)
2: Via analog input AVI
3: Via analog input ACI
4: Via analog input AUI
5: Via RS-485 serial communication
(Pr.10-54)
6: Calculated by integrating thickness
(encoder is on motor.)
10-43
Max. Reel Diameter
1~10000 mm
10-44
Empty Reel Diameter
1~10000 mm
5-18
Factory
Customer
Setting
2
0
50.0
1.00
0.00
50.0
1.00
0.00
0
20.00
1
1000.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
1000
1
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
10-45
★10-46
10-47
10-48
10-49
10-50
10-51
10-52
10-53
★10-54
10-55
10-56
10-57
10-58
10-59
10-60
10-61
10-62
10-63
10-64
10-65
10-66
10-67
10-68
Explanation
Source of Initial Reel
Diameter
Initial Reel Diameter 0
Initial Reel Diameter 1
Initial Reel Diameter 2
Number of Pulse per
Revolution
Coil Number for Each
Layer
Material Thickness
Filter Time of Reel
Diameter Calculation
Reserved
Current Reel Diameter
Smart Start
Switch Level for Smart
Start and PID function
Frequency for Smart
Start
Accel. Time for Smart
Start
Broken Line Detection
Min. Line Speed of
Broken Line Detection
Allowance Error of Reel
Diameter of Broken Line
Detection
Detection Time of
Broken Line
Allowance Error Level of
Tension PID Feedback
Allowance Error
Detection Time of
Tension PID Feedback
Error Treatment of
Tension PID Feedback
Upper Limit of Tension
PID Feedback
Lower Limit of Tension
PID Feedback
Reserved
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Settings
0: Via RS-485 serial communication
(Pr.10-46)
1: Via analog input AVI
2: Via analog input ACI
3: Via analog input AUI
1~10000 mm
1~10000 mm
1~10000 mm
1~10000
1~10000
0.001~60.000 mm
0.00~100.00 sec
1~10000 mm
0: Disable
1: Enable
0~100% (according to Pr.10-26 PID
Target Value of Tension)
0.10~400.00Hz
0.1~3600.0 sec/0.01~3600.00 sec
0: Disable
1: Enable
0.1~3000.0 m/min.
Factory
Customer
Setting
0
1
1
1
1
1
0.001
1.00
1
0
15.0
2.00
3.0
0
200.0
100
1~10000 mm
0.1~1000.0 sec
0.0~100.0%
0.5
100.0
0.5
0.1~1000.0 sec
0: Warn (rFbE) and keep operating
1: Warn (rFbE) and ramp to stop
2: Warn (rFbE) and coast to stop
0.0~100.0%
0.0~100.0%
2
100.0
0.0
5-19
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Parameter
10-69
10-70
10-71
Explanation
DFM Selection
Filter Time of Line
Speed
Reserved
Factory
Customer
Setting
0
Settings
0: Output frequency
1: Frequency command
2: Line speed
0.00
0.00~100.00 sec
Group 11 Fan & Pump Control Parameters
Parameter
Explanation
11-00
V/f Curve Selection
11-01
Start-Up Frequency of
the Auxiliary Motor
Stop Frequency of the
Auxiliary Motor
Time Delay before
Starting the Auxiliary
Motor
Time Delay before
Stopping the Auxiliary
Motor
Sleep/Wake Up
Detection Time
Sleep Frequency
Wakeup Frequency
11-02
11-03
11-04
11-05
11-06
11-07
5-20
Settings
00: V/f curve determined by parameter
group 01
01: 1.5 power curve
02: 1.7 power curve
03: Square curve
04: Cube curve
0.00~400.00 Hz
Factory
Customer
Setting
00
0.00
0.00~400.00 Hz
0.00
0.0~3600.0 sec
0.0
0.0~3600.0 sec
0.0
0.0~6550.0 sec
0.0
0.00~Fmax
0.00~Fmax
0.00
0.00
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
5.2 Parameter Settings for Applications
„ Speed Search
Applications
Windmill, winding
machine, fan and all
inertia load
Purpose
Restart freerunning motor
Functions
Before the free-running motor is
completely stopped, it can be restarted
without detecting motor speed. The AC
motor drive will auto search motor
speed and will accelerate when its
speed is the same as the motor speed.
Related
Parameters
08-06
08-07
08-19
08-20
„ DC Brake before Running
Applications
Purpose
When e.g. windmills,
Keep the freefans and pumps rotate running motor at
freely by wind or flow standstill.
without applying power
Functions
If the running direction of the freerunning motor is not steady, please
execute DC brake before start-up.
Related
Parameters
08-00
08-01
„ Motor power switch-over between AC motor drive and commercial power
Applications
Windmills, pumps,
extruders
Purpose
Functions
Switching motor
power between AC
motor drive and
commercial power
When switching motor power between
the AC motor drive and commercial
power, it is unnecessary to stop the
motor or start by commercial power
with heavy duty before switching to by
AC motor drive control
Purpose
Functions
Related
Parameters
03-00
03-01
03-02
03-03
„ Energy Saving
Applications
Punching machines
and precision
machinery
Energy saving and
less vibrations
Energy saving when the AC motor
drive runs at constant speed, yet full
power acceleration and deceleration
For precision machinery it also helps
to lower vibrations.
Related
Parameters
08-15
„ Multi-step Operation
Applications
Conveying machinery
Purpose
Functions
Related
Parameters
Cyclic operation by To control 15-step speeds and duration 04-04~04-09
multi-step speeds. by simple contact signal.
05-00~05-14
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-21
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
„ Switching acceleration and deceleration time
Applications
Auto turntable for
conveying machinery
Purpose
Switching
acceleration and
deceleration time
by external signal
Related
Parameters
Functions
Switching the multi-step
acceleration/deceleration by external
signals. When an AC motor drive
drives two or more motors, it can reach
high-speed but still start and stop
smoothly.
01-09~01-12
01-18~01-21
04-04~04-09
„ Overheat Warning
Applications
Air conditioner
Functions
Related
Parameters
When the AC motor drive overheats, it
uses a thermal sensor to generate a
overheat warning.
03-00~03-03
04-04~04-09
Functions
Related
Parameters
Purpose
Safety measure
„ Two-wire/three-wire
Applications
Purpose
FWD:("OPEN":STOP)
("CLOSE":FWD)
FWD/STOP
REV:("OPEN": STOP)
("CLOSE": REV)
REV/STOP
DCM
General application
To run, stop,
forward and
reverse by external
terminals
VFD-BW
FWD:("OPEN":STOP)
("CLOSE":RUN)
RUN/STOP
REV:("OPEN": F WD)
("CLOSE": REV)
FWD/REV
DCM
STOP
02-05
04-04~04-09
RUN
VFD-BW
FWD:("CLOSE":RUN)
EF: ("OPEN":STOP)
REV/FWD
REV:("OPEN": F WD)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
VFD-BW
„ Operation Command
Applications
General application
Purpose
Selecting the
source of control
signal
Functions
Related
Parameters
Selection of AC motor drive control by
external terminals, digital keypad or
RS485.
02-01
04-04~04-09
Functions
Related
Parameters
„ Frequency Hold
Applications
General application
5-22
Purpose
Acceleration/
Hold output frequency during
deceleration pause Acceleration/deceleration
04-04~04-09
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
„ Auto Restart after Fault
Applications
Air conditioners,
remote pumps
Purpose
Functions
For continuous and
The AC motor drive can be
reliable operation
restarted/reset automatically up to 10
without operator
times after a fault occurs.
intervention
Related
Parameters
08-14
08-21
„ Emergency Stop by DC Brake
Applications
High-speed rotors
Purpose
Emergency stop
without brake
resistor
Functions
AC motor drive can use DC brake for
emergency stop when a quick stop is
needed without brake resistor. When
used often, take motor cooling into
consideration.
Related
Parameters
08-00
08-02
08-03
„ Over-torque Setting
Applications
Pumps, fans and
extruders
Purpose
To protect
machines and to
have continuous/
reliable operation
Functions
The over-torque detection level can be
set. Once OC stall, OV stall and overtorque occurs, the output frequency
will be adjusted automatically. It is
suitable for machines like fans and
pumps that require continuous
operation.
Related
Parameters
06-00~06-05
„ Upper/Lower Limit Frequency
Applications
Pump and fan
Purpose
Control the motor
speed within
upper/lower limit
Functions
When user cannot provide
upper/lower limit, gain or bias from
external signal, it can be set
individually in AC motor drive.
Related
Parameters
01-07
01-08
„ Skip Frequency Setting
Applications
Pumps and fans
Purpose
To prevent
machine vibrations
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Functions
The AC motor drive cannot run at
constant speed in the skip frequency
range. Three skip frequency ranges
can be set. It is used to smooth
vibration at certain frequencies.
Related
Parameters
08-00~08-13
5-23
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
„ Carrier Frequency Setting
Applications
General application
Purpose
Low noise
Functions
The carrier frequency can be
increased when required to reduce
motor noise.
Related
Parameters
02-03
„ Keep Running when Frequency Command is Lost
Applications
Air conditioners
Purpose
For continuous
operation
Functions
When the frequency command is lost
by a system malfunction, the AC
motor drive can still run. Suitable for
intelligent air conditioners.
Related
Parameters
02-07
„ Display the Speed of Load
Applications
General application
Purpose
Display running
status
Functions
Display motor speed(rpm) and
machine speed(rpm) on keypad.
Related
Parameters
00-04
03-05
„ Output Signal during Running
Applications
General application
Purpose
Functions
Signal available to stop braking when
Provide a signal for the AC motor drive is running. (This
running status
signal will disappear when the AC
motor drive is free-running.)
Related
Parameters
03-00~03-03
„ Output Signal in Zero Speed
Applications
General application
Purpose
Functions
When the output frequency is lower
Provide a signal for than the min. output frequency, a
running status
signal is given for external system or
control wiring.
Related
Parameters
03-00~03-03
„ Output Signal at Master Frequency
Applications
General application
5-24
Purpose
Functions
When the output frequency is at the
master frequency (by frequency
Provide a signal for
command), a signal is given for
running status
external system or control wiring
(frequency attained).
Related
Parameters
03-00~03-03
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
„ Output signal for Over-torque
Applications
Pumps, fans and
extruders
Purpose
To protect
machines and to
have continuous/
reliable operation
Functions
When over-torque is detected, a
signal is given to prevent machines
from damage.
Related
Parameters
03-00~03-03
06-04~06-05
„ Output Signal for Low Voltage
Applications
General application
Purpose
Functions
When low voltage is detected, a signal
Provide a signal for
is given for external system or control
running status
wiring.
Related
Parameters
03-00~03-03
„ Output Signal at Desired Frequency
Applications
General application
Purpose
Functions
When the output frequency is at the
Provide a signal for desired frequency (by frequency
running status
command), a signal is given for
external system or control wiring.
Related
Parameters
03-00~03-03
03-04
03-10
„ Output Signal for Base Block
Applications
General application
Purpose
Functions
When executing Base Block, a signal
Provide a signal for
is given for external system or control
running status
wiring.
Related
Parameters
03-00~03-03
„ Overheat Warning for Heat Sink
Applications
General application
Purpose
For safety
Functions
When heat sink is overheated, a
signal is given for external system or
control wiring.
Related
Parameters
03-00~03-03
„ Multi-function Analog Output
Applications
General application
Purpose
Display running
status
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Functions
The value of frequency, output
current/voltage can be read by adding
a frequency meter or voltage/current
meter.
Related
Parameters
03-05
5-25
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
„ Tension Control
Applications
On occasions of
rewind/unwind or
other indirect tension
control
5-26
Purpose
Control constant
tension of line,
sheeting
Functions
AC motor drive’s output frequency is
tuned by the frequency calculated by
line speed and reel diameter
superposing PID feedback value so as
to achieve constant tension control.
Related
Parameters
10-21~10-71
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
5.3 Description of Parameter Settings
: This parameter can be set during operation.
★: This parameter can be memorized only when LV or fault occurs.
Group 00: User Parameters
00 - 00 Identity Code of the AC motor drive
Settings
Read Only
Factory setting: ##
00 - 01 Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive
Settings
Read Only
Factory setting: #.#
Pr. 00-00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. The capacity, rated current, rated
voltage and the max. carrier frequency relate to the identity code. Users can use the following
table to check how the rated current, rated voltage and max. carrier frequency of the AC motor
drive correspond to the identity code.
Pr.00-01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive. By reading this parameter the user
can check if the AC motor drive is correct.
460V Series
kW
0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5
HP
1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5
Pr.00-00
05 07 09 11 13
Rated Output
2.7 4.2 5.5 8.5 13
Current (A)
Max. Carrier
15kHz
Frequency
7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
18 24 32 38
55
75
31
75 90 110 132 160 185
100 125 150 175 215 250
33 35 37 39 41 43
45 60 73 91 110 150 180 220 260 310 370
9kHz
6kHz
00 - 02 Parameter Reset
Factory Setting: 00
Settings 08
Keypad Lock
09
All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 220V/380V)
10
All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 220V/440V)
This parameter allows the user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault
records (Pr.06-08 ~ Pr.06-11).
50Hz: Pr.01-01 is set to 50Hz and Pr.01-02 is set to 230V, 400V.
60Hz: Pr.01-01 is set to 60Hz and Pr.01-02 is set to 230V, 460V.
When Pr.00-02=08, the VFD-PU01 keypad is locked. To unlock the keypad, set Pr.00-02=00.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-27
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
00 - 03
Start-up Display Selection
Factory Setting: 00
Settings 00
Display the frequency command value. (LED F)
01
Display the actual output frequency (LED H)
02
Display the content of user-defined unit (LED U)
03
Multifunction display, see Pr.00-04
04
FWD/REV command
This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive.
00 - 04
Content of Multi-Function Display
Factory Setting: 00
Settings 00
5-28
Display the output current in A supplied to the motor
01
Display the counter value which counts the number of
pulses on TRG terminal
02
When the PLC function is active, the current step and
its remaining operation time in s are shown.
03
Display the actual DC BUS voltage in VDC of the AC
motor drive
04
Display the output voltage in VAC of terminals U, V, W
to the motor.
05
Display the power factor angle in º of terminals U, V, W
to the motor.
06
Display the output power in kW of terminals U, V and W
to the motor.
07
Display the actual motor speed in rpm (enabled in
vector control mode or PG (Encoder) feedback control)
(LED H and LED U).
08
Display the estimated value of torque in Nm as it relates
to current.
09
Display PG encoder feedback pulses/10ms.
Display value= (rpm*PPR)/6000 (see note)
10
Display analog feedback signal value in %.
11
Display the signal of AVI analog input terminal in %.
Range 0~10V corresponds to 0~100%. (LED U)
12
Display the signal of ACI analog input terminal in %.
Range 4~20mA corresponds to 0~100%. (LED U)
13
Display the signal of AUI analog input terminal in %.
Range -10V~10V corresponds to 0~100%. (LED U)
14
Display the temperature of heat sink in °C.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
This parameter sets the display when Pr. 00-03 is set to 03.
Pr.00-04=09. The display value is (((rpm/60)*PPR)/1000ms)*10ms
with rpm=motor speed in revs/min and PPR=encoder pulse per revolution
When the display shows the multi-function display (Pr.00-03=03), the user also can view other
information by pressing the “LEFT” key
00-05
User Defined Coefficient K
Settings
on the VFD-PU01 keypad.
0.01 to 160.00
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 1.00
The coefficient K determines the multiplying factor for the user-defined unit.
The display value is calculated as follows:
U (User-defined unit) = Frequency Command * K (Pr.00-05)
H (actual output) = Actual output frequency * K (Pr.00-05)
Example:
A conveyor belt runs at 13.6m/s at motor speed 60Hz.
K = 13.6/60 = 0.23 (0.226667 rounded to 2 decimals), therefore Pr.00-05=0.23
With Frequency command 35Hz, display shows LED U and 35*0.23=8.05m/s.
(To increase accuracy, use K=2.27 or K=22.67 and disregard decimal point.)
00 - 06 Software Version
Settings
Read Only
Display
#.##
00 - 07 Password Input
Unit: 1
Settings
00 to 65535
Display
00~02 (times of wrong password)
Factory Setting: 00
The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set in Pr.00-08. Input the correct
password here to enable changing parameters. You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts.
After 3 consecutive failed attempts, a blinking “PcodE” will show up to force the user to restart
the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password.
00 - 08 Password Set
Unit: 1
Settings
00 to 65535
Display
00
No password set or successful input in Pr. 00-07
01
Password has been set
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Factory Setting: 00
5-29
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
To set a password to protect your parameter settings.
If the display shows 00, no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr.0007. All parameters can then be changed, including Pr.00-08.
The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of password the display
will show 01.
Be sure to record the password for later use.
To cancel the parameter lock, set the parameter to 00 after inputting correct password into Pr.
00-07.
The password consists of min. 2 digits and max. 5 digits.
How to make the password valid again after decoding by Pr.00-07:
Method 1: Re-input original password into Pr.00-08 (Or you can enter a new password if you
want to use a changed or new one).
Method 2: After rebooting, password function will be recovered.
Password Decode Flow Chart
00-08
Displays 00 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00-07.
00-07
Correct Password
END
Incorrect Password
END
00-08
00-07
Displays 00 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00-07.
3 chances to enter the correct
password.
1st time displays "01" if
password is incorrect.
2nd time displays "02", if
password is incorrect.
3rd time displays "P code"
(blinking)
If the password was entered
incorrectly after three tries,
the keypad will be locked.
Turn the power OFF/ON to
re-enter the password.
5-30
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
00 - 09 Control method
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
V/f control
01
V/f + PG Control
02
Vector Control
03
Vector + PG Control
This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive.
PG is encoder (Pulse Generator) feedback for which an optional PG card is required.
00 - 10 Reserved
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-31
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Group 01: Basic Parameters
01 - 00
Maximum Output Frequency (Fmax)
Settings
Unit: 0.01
50.00 to 400.00Hz
Factory Setting: 60.00
This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC
motor drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V, 4 to 20mA and -10V to
+10V) are scaled to correspond to the output frequency range.
01 - 01
Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase)
Settings
Unit: 0.01
0.10 to 400.00Hz
Factory Setting: 60.00
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the
motor nameplate. Maximum Voltage Frequency determines the v/f curve ratio. For example, if
the drive is rated for 460 VAC output and the Maximum Voltage Frequency is set to 60Hz, the
drive will maintain a constant ratio of 7.66 V/Hz (460V/60Hz=7.66V/Hz). This parameter value
must be equal to or greater than the Mid-Point Frequency (Pr.01-03).
01 - 02 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax)
Settings
Unit: 0.1
230V series
0.1 to 255.0V
Factory Setting: 220.0
460V series
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 440.0
This parameter determines the Maximum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive. The Maximum
Output Voltage setting must be smaller than or equal to the rated voltage of the motor as
indicated on the motor nameplate. This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the
Mid-Point Voltage (Pr.01-04).
01 - 03
Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid)
Settings
0.10 to 400.00Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.50
This parameter sets the Mid-Point Frequency of the V/f curve. With this setting, the V/f ratio
between Minimum Frequency and Mid-Point frequency can be determined. This parameter
must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01-05) and equal to or less
than Maximum Voltage Frequency (Pr.01-01).
This parameter is ineffective when Pr.11-00 is set to 1 to 4.
The settings of 01-03, 01-04, and 01-06 are invalid in vector control mode.
5-32
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
01 - 04
Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid)
Settings
Unit: 0.1
230V series
0.1 to 255.0V
Factory Setting: 1.7V
460V series
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 3.4V
This parameter sets the Mid-Point Voltage of any V/f curve. With this setting, the V/f ratio
between Minimum Frequency and Mid-Point Frequency can be determined. This parameter
must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Voltage (Pr.01-06) and equal to or less than
Maximum Output Voltage (Pr.01-02).
This parameter is ineffective when Pr.11-00 is set to 1 to 4.
The settings of 01-03, 01-04, and 01-06 are invalid in vector control mode.
01 - 05
Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin)
Settings
0.10 to 400.00Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.50
This parameter sets the Minimum Output Frequency of the AC motor drive. This parameter
must be equal to or less than Mid-Point Frequency (Pr.01-03).
01 - 06
Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin)
Settings
Unit: 0.1
230V series
0.1 to 255.0V
Factory Setting: 1.7V
460V series
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 3.4V
This parameter sets the Minimum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive. This parameter must
be equal to or less than Mid-Point Voltage (Pr.01-04).
The settings of Pr.01-01 to Pr.01-06 have to meet the condition of Pr.01-02 ≥ Pr.01-04 ≥ Pr.0106 and Pr.01-01 ≥ Pr.01-03 ≥ Pr.01-05.
In vector control mode, the settings of 01-03, 01-04, and 01-06 are invalid, whereas, Pr.01-05
is still the Minimum Output Frequency of the AC motor drive.
01 - 07
Output Frequency Upper Limit
Settings
01 to 120%
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100
This parameter must be equal to or greater than the Output Frequency Lower Limit (Pr.01-08).
The Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) is regarded as 100%.
Output Frequency Upper Limit value = (Pr.01-00 * Pr.01-07)/100.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-33
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
1-08
Voltage
1-07
Output Frequency
Lower Limit
Output Frequency
Upper Limit
1-02
Maximum
Output
Voltage
1-04
Mid-point
Voltage
The limit of
Output
Frequency
Frequency
1-06
Minimum
1-05
Output
Voltage Minimum
Output
Freq.
1-03
Mid-point
Freq.
1-01
Maximum Voltage
Frequency
(Base Frequency)
1-00
Maximum
Output
Frequency
V/f Curve
01 - 08 Output Frequency Lower Limit
Settings
Unit: 1
0 to 100%
Factory Setting: 0
The Upper/Lower Limits are to prevent operation errors and machine damage.
If the Output Frequency Upper Limit is 50Hz and the Maximum Output Frequency is 60Hz, the
Output Frequency will be limited to 50Hz.
If the Output Frequency Lower Limit is 10Hz, and the Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01-05) is
set to 1.5Hz, then any Command Frequency between 1.5~10Hz will generate a 10Hz output
from the drive.
This parameter must be equal to or less than the Output Frequency Upper Limit (Pr.01-07).
The Output Frequency Lower Limit value = (Pr.01-00 * Pr.01-08) /100.
01 - 09
Acceleration Time 1 (Taccel 1)
01 - 10
Deceleration Time 1 (Tdecel 1)
Unit: 0.1/0.01
01 - 11
Acceleration Time 2 (Taccel 2)
Unit: 0.1/0.01
01 - 12
Deceleration Time 2 (Tdecel 2)
Unit: 0.1/0.01
01 - 18
Acceleration Time 3 (Taccel 3)
Unit: 0.1/0.01
01 - 19
Deceleration Time 3 (Tdecel 3)
Unit: 0.1/0.01
01 - 20
Acceleration Time 4 (Taccel 4)
Unit: 0.1/0.01
01 - 21
Deceleration Time 4 (Tdecel 4)
Settings
5-34
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
0.01 to 3600.0 sec
Factory Setting: 10.0
Factory setting for models of 30hp (22kW) and above is 60sec.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
01 - 23 Accel/Decel Time Unit
Factory Setting: 01
Settings
00
Unit: 1 sec
01
Unit: 0.1 sec
02
Unit: 0.01 sec
The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to
accelerate from 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00). The rate is linear unless SCurve is “Enabled”, see Pr.01-16.
The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to
decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) down to 0 Hz. The rate is linear
unless S-Curve is “Enabled.”, see Pr.01-17.
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-Function
Input Terminals Settings. See Pr.04-04 to Pr.04-09 for more details.
In the diagram shown below, the Acceleration/Deceleration Time of the AC motor drive is the
time between 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00). Suppose the Maximum Output
Frequency is 60 Hz, Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01-05) is 1.0 Hz, and
Acceleration/Deceleration Time is 10 seconds. The actual time for the AC motor drive to
accelerate from start-up to 60 Hz and to decelerate from 60Hz to 1.0Hz is in this case 9.83
seconds. ((60-1) * 10 /60=9.83secs).
Frequency
01-00
Max. output
Frequency
setting
operation
frequency
01-05
Min. output
frequency
0 Hz
Decel. Time
Accel. Time
01-09
01-11
01-18
01-20
The definition of
Accel./Decel. Time
Resulting
01-10
01-12
01-19
01-21
Time
Resulting
Decel. Time
Accel. Time
Resulting Accel./Decel. Time
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-35
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
01 - 13
Jog Acceleration Time
Settings
01 - 22
Unit: 0.1
0.1 to 3600.0 sec
Factory Setting: 1.0
Jog Frequency
Settings
Factory Setting: 1.0
Jog Deceleration Time
Settings
01 - 14
Unit: 0.1
0.1 to 3600.0 sec
Unit: 0.1
0.10 to 400.00Hz
Factory Setting: 1.0
Both external terminal JOG and key “JOG” on the keypad can be used. When the Jog
command is “ON”, the AC motor drive will accelerate from Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.0105) to Jog Frequency (Pr.01-14). When the Jog command is “OFF”, the AC motor drive will
decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero. The used Accel/Decel time is set by the Jog
Accel/Decel time (Pr.01-13, Pr.01-22).
Before using the JOG command, the drive must be stopped first. And during Jog operation,
other operation commands cannot be accepted, except command via the FORWARD,
REVERSE and STOP keys on the digital keypad.
Frequency
01-14
JOG
Frequency
01-05
Min. output
frequency
0 Hz
JOG Accel. Time
JOG Decel. Time
01-13
Time
01-22
The definition of JOG Accel./Decel. Time
01 -15
Auto-Acceleration / Deceleration
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
5-36
00
Linear acceleration / deceleration
01
Auto acceleration, linear Deceleration.
02
Linear acceleration, auto Deceleration.
03
Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by load)
04
Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by Accel/Decel Time setting)
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
With Auto acceleration / deceleration it is possible to reduce vibration and shocks during
starting/stopping the load.
During Auto acceleration the torque is automatically measured and the drive will accelerate to
the set frequency with the fastest acceleration time and the smoothest start current.
During Auto deceleration, regenerative energy is measured and the motor is smoothly stopped
with the fastest deceleration time.
But when this parameter is set to 04, the actual accel/decel time will be equal to or more than
parameter Pr.01-09 to Pr.01-12 and Pr.01-18 to Pr.01-21.
Auto acceleration/deceleration makes the complicated processes of tuning unnecessary. It
makes operation efficient and saves energy by acceleration without stall and deceleration
without brake resistor.
In applications with brake resistor or brake unit, Auto deceleration shall not be used.
01 - 16 Acceleration S-Curve
01 - 17 Deceleration S-Curve
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
S-curve disabled
01 to 07
S-curve enabled (07 is smoothest)
This parameter is used to ensure smooth acceleration and deceleration via S-curve.
The S-curve is disabled when set to 00 and enabled when set to 01 to 07.
Setting 01 gives the quickest and setting 07 the longest and smoothest S-curve.
The AC motor drive will not follow the Accel/Decel Times in Pr.01-09 to Pr.01-12 and Pr.01-18
to Pr.01-21 when S-curve is enabled.
The diagram below shows that the original setting of the Accel/Decel Time is only for reference
when the S-curve is enabled. The actual Accel/Decel Time depends on the selected S-curve
(01 to 07).
2
1
3
4
2
1
3
4
1 2
3 4
Disable S curve
Enable S curve
Acceleration/deceleration Characteristics
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-37
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Group 02: Operation Method Parameters
02 - 00
Source of First Master Frequency Command
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
02 - 13
00
Digital keypad (PU01)
01
0 ~ +10V from AVI
02
4 ~ 20mA from ACI
03
-10 ~ +10V from AUI
04
RS-485 serial communication (RJ-11). Last used frequency saved.
05
RS-485 serial communication (RJ-11). Last used frequency not
saved.
06
Combined use of master and auxiliary frequency command
See Pr. 02-10 to 02-12
Source of Second Master Frequency Command
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Digital keypad (PU01)
01
0 ~ +10V from AVI
02
4 ~ 20mA from ACI
03
-10 ~ +10V from AUI
04
RS-485 serial communication (RJ-11). Last used frequency saved.
05
RS-485 serial communication (RJ-11). Last used frequency not
saved.
06
Combined use of master and auxiliary frequency command
See Pr. 02-10 to 02-12
These parameters set the Master Frequency Command Source of the AC motor drive. And
they are disabled if tension control is enabled (Pr.10-21 is set to 01).
02 - 01
Source of First Operation Command
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
02 - 14
00
Digital keypad (PU01)
01
External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.
02
External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.
03
RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.
04
RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.
Source of Second Operation Command
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
5-38
00
Digital keypad (PU01)
01
External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
02
External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.
03
RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.
04
RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.
When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal, please refer to Pr.02-05 for details.
The first /second frequency/operation command is enabled/disabled by Multi Function Input
Terminals. Please refer to of Pr.04-04 ~ 04-09.
02 - 10
Source of the Master Frequency Command
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
02 - 11
00
Digital keypad (PU01)
01
0~10V from AVI
02
4~20mA from ACI
03
-10~10V from AUI
04
RS-485 serial communication
Source of the Auxiliary Frequency Command
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
02 - 12
00
Digital keypad (PU01)
01
0~10V from AVI
02
4~20mA from ACI
03
-10~10V from AUI
04
RS-485 serial communication
Combination of the Master and Auxiliary Frequency
Command
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Master frequency + Auxiliary frequency
01
Master frequency - Auxiliary frequency
These three parameters (Pr.02-10~02-12) are enabled when Pr.02-00 or Pr.02-13 are set to
06. If they are enabled, the frequency command will be determined by these parameters.
02 - 02 Stop Method
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
STOP: ramp to stop
E.F.: coast to stop
01
STOP: coast to stop
E.F.: coast to stop
02
STOP: ramp to stop
E.F.: ramp to stop
03
STOP: coast to stop
E.F.: ramp to stop
The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid
stop command or detects External Fault.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-39
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
1. Ramp:
the AC motor drive decelerates to Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01-05)
according to the deceleration time and then stops.
2. Coast:
the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon command, and the motor
free runs until it comes to a complete standstill.
3. The motor stop method is usually determined by the characteristics of the motor load and
how frequently it is stopped.
(1)
It is recommended to use “ramp to stop” for safety of personnel or to prevent
material from being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the
drive is stopped. The deceleration time has to be set accordingly.
(2)
If the motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is
recommended to select “coast to stop”.
For example: blowers, punching machines, centrifuges and pumps.
Frequency
output
frequency
Frequency
output
frequency
motor
speed
motor
speed
Time
operation
command
RUN
stops according to
decel eration time
STOP
Time
operation
command
RUN
free run to stop
STOP
ramp to stop and free run to stop
Frequency
Frequency
frequency output
motor
speed
frequency
output
motor
speed
operation
command
EF
5-40
stops according to
decel eration time
When Pr.02-02 is set to 2 or 3
operation
command
free run to stop
EF
When Pr.02-02 is set to 0 or 1
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
02 - 03
PWM Carrier Frequency Selections
1-5HP
0.75-3.7kW
01~15kHz
15kHz
Power
Setting Range
Factory Setting
Unit: 1
230V/460V Series
7.5-25HP
5.5-18.5kW
01~15kHz
09kHz
30-60HP
22-45kW
01~09kHz
06kHz
75-250HP
55-185kW
01~06kHz
06kHz
This parameter determines the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive.
Carrier
Frequency
Acoustic
Noise
1kHz
Significant
Electromagnetic
Noise or leakage
current
Minimal
Heat
Dissipation
Current
Wave
Minimal
Minimal
Significant
Significant
8kHz
15kHz
Minimal
Significant
From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the
electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise.
02 - 04 Motor Direction Control
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Enable Forward/Reverse operation
01
Disable Reverse operation
02
Disabled Forward operation
The parameter determines the AC motor drive direction of rotation. See Chapter 2 for definition
of direction of rotation.
02 - 05 2-wire/ 3-wire Operation Control Modes
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
2-wire: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
01
2-wire: FWD/REV, RUN/STOP
02
3-wire Operation
There are three different types of control modes:
02-05
00
2-wire
FWD /STOP
REV / STOP
External Terminal
FWD/STOP
FWD:("OPEN":STOP)
("CLOSE":FWD)
REV/STOP
REV:("OPEN": STOP)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
VFD-BW
5-41
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
02-05
External Terminal
2-wire
FWD / REV
RUN / STOP
01
RUN/STOP
FWD:("OPEN":STOP)
("CLOSE":RUN)
FWD/REV
REV:("OPEN": F WD)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
STOP
02
RUN
FWD:("CLOSE":RUN)
EF: ("OPEN":STOP)
3-wire
REV/FWD
02- 06
VFD-BW
REV:("OPEN": F WD)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
VFD-BW
Line Start Lockout
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Disable. Operation status is not changed even if operation
command source Pr.02-01 and/or Pr.02-14 is changed.
01
Enable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command
source Pr.02-01 and/or Pr.02-14 is changed.
02
Disable. Operation status will change if operation command source
Pr.02-01 and/or Pr.02-14 is changed.
03
Enable. Operation status will change if operation command source
Pr.02-01 and/or Pr.02-14 is changed.
This parameter determines the response of the drive when power is on and the operation
command source is changed.
Pr.02-06
Operation status when operation
command source is changed
Start lockout (Run when power is ON)
0
Disable (AC motor drive will run)
Keep previous status
1
Enable (AC motor drive won’t run)
Keep previous status
2
Disable (AC motor drive will run)
Change according to the new
operation command source
3
Enable (AC motor drive won’t run)
Change according to the new
operation command source
When the operation command source is from an external terminal and operation command is
ON (FWD/REV-DCM=close), the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr.02-06 after
power is applied. <For terminals FWD and REV only>
1.
5-42
When Pr.02-06 is set to 0 or 2, AC motor drive will run immediately.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
2.
When Pr.02-06 is set to 1 or 3, AC motor drive will remain stopped until operation
command is received after previous operation command is cancelled.
FWD-DCM (close)
Pr.02-01=0
OFF
ON
RUN
STOP
RUN
STOP
output frequency
Pr.02-06=2 or 3
Change operation
command source
Pr.02-01=1 or 2
This action will follow FWD/DCM
or REV/DCM status
(ON is close/OFF is open)
output frequency
Pr.02-06=0 or 1
When the operation command source isn’t from the external terminals, independently from
whether the AC motor drive runs or stops, the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr.0206 if the two conditions below are both met.
1.
When operation command source is changed to external terminal (Pr.02-01=1 or 2, Pr.0214=1 or 2)
2.
The status of terminal and AC motor drive is different.
And the operation of the AC motor drive will be:
1.
When setting 0 or 1, the status of AC motor drive is not changed by the terminal status.
2.
When setting 2 or 3, the status of AC motor drive is changed by the terminal status.
FWD-DCM (close)
power is applied
OFF
ON
OFF
output frequency
Pr.02-06=0 or 2
ON
ON
it will run
output frequency
Pr.02-06=1 or 3
it won't run
when power is applied
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
It needs to received a run command
after previous command is cancelled
5-43
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
The Line Start Lockout feature does not guarantee that the motor will never start under this
condition. It is possible the motor may be set in motion by a malfunctioning switch.
02- 07
Loss of ACI Signal (4~20mA)
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Decelerate to 0Hz
01
Coast to stop and display “EF”
02
Continue operation by the last frequency command
This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost.
When set to 00 or 02, it will display warning message “AnLEr” on the keypad in case of loss of
ACI signal and execute the setting. When ACI signal is recovered, the warning message
usually disappears automatically. If the warning message is still displayed, please press
“MODE” key to make it disappear.
02 - 08
Up/Down Mode
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
02 - 09
Based on Accel/Decel time according to Pr.01-09 to 01-12 and
Pr.01-18 to 01-21
01
Constant speed (according to Pr. 02-09)
02
Based on Accel/Decel time according to Pr.01-09 to 01-12 and
Pr.01-18 to 01-21, but frequency command will be 0 when stopped
(only for frequency command from digital keypad PU01)
Accel/Decel Rate of Change of UP/DOWN Operation with
Constant Speed
Settings
00
0.01~1.00 Hz/msec
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.01
These parameters determine the increase/decrease of the master frequency when operated
via the Multi-Function Inputs when Pr.04-04~Pr.04-09 are set to 11 (Up command) or 12
(Down command).
02 - 15
Keypad Frequency Command
Settings
5-44
0.00 to 400.00 Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 60.00
This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read keypad frequency command.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Group 03: Output Function Parameters
03 - 00
Multi-function Output Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1)
03 - 01
Multi-function Output Terminal MO1
Factory Setting: 08
Factory Setting: 01
03 - 02
Multi-function Output Terminal MO2
03 - 03
Multi-function Output Terminal MO3
Factory Setting: 02
Settings
Settings
00~36
Function
00
No Function
01
AC Drive Operational
02
Master Frequency
Attained
Factory Setting: 20
Description
Active when there is an output from the drive or RUN
command is “ON”.
Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output
frequency setting.
03
Zero Speed
Active when Command Frequency is lower than the
Minimum Output Frequency.
04
Over-Torque Detection
Active as long as over-torque is detected. (Refer to Pr.06-03
~ Pr.06-05)
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Indication
Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off
during baseblock. Base block can be forced by Multi-function
input (setting 9 or 10).
Low-Voltage Indication
Active when low voltage(Lv) is detected.
Operation Mode
Active when operation command is controlled by external
terminal.
Baseblock (B.B.)
Indication
Fault Indication
Desired Frequency
Active when faults occur (oc, ov, oH, oL, oL1, EF, cF3, HPF,
ocA, ocd, ocn, GFF).
Active when the desired frequency (Pr.03-04) is attained.
Attained 1
PLC Program Running
PLC Program Step
Active when PLC Program is running.
Active for 0.5 sec each time the multi-step speed is attained.
Completed
12
Active for 0.5 sec when the PLC program cycle has
PLC Program Completed completed.
13
PLC Operation Paused
14
Terminal Count Value
Active when PLC operation is paused.
Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value.
Attained
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-45
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Settings
15
Function
Preliminary Count Value
Auxiliary Motor 1
17
Auxiliary Motor 2
18
Auxiliary Motor 3
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
For the fan & pump control applications, one can use the
Multi-function Output Terminals (1-3) to define the auxiliary
motor. When using with group 10 PID Controls and group 11
Fan and Pump Control, it can control flow of many motors.
Warning (OH1)
When the heatsink overheats, it will signal to prevent OH
from turning off the drive. When it is higher than 85oC
(185oF), it will be ON. If not, it will be OFF.
AC Motor Drive Ready
Active when the drive is on and no abnormality detected.
Heat Sink Overheat
Emergency Stop
Active once the drive’s emergency stop function is activated.
Indication
Desired Frequency
Active when the desired frequency (Pr.03-10) is attained.
Attained 2
Software Brake Signal
Zero Speed Output
Signal
Low-current Detection
Operation Indication
This function is used in conjunction with a VFDB Brake Unit.
The output will be activated when the drive needs help
braking the load. A smooth deceleration is achieved by using
this function.
Active unless there is an output frequency present at
terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
Active once the drive’s current has fallen below its minimum
allowable value. (Refer to Pr.06-12, 06-13)
Active when there is output voltage from U, V, W.
(H>=Fmin)
Feedback Signal Error
User-defined Lowvoltage Detection
Mechanical Brake
29
Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value.
Attained
16
19
Description
Control (Desired
Active when the feedback signal is abnormal. (Refer to
Pr.10-08, Pr.10-16)
Active once the DC Bus voltage is too low. (Refer to Pr.0616, Pr.06-17)
Active when output frequency ≥Pr.03-13. Deactivated when
output frequency ≤Pr.03-14 after STOP command.
Frequency Attained 3)
30
31
32
33
5-46
Motor’s Temperature
Active when the motor’s temperature reaches the set value.
Warning
Motor Overheat
Active once the motor’s temperature has risen above its
maximum allowable value.
Full Reel Diameter
Attained
Valid for tension control mode.
Empty Reel Diameter
Attained
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Settings
34
35
36
Function
Broken Line Detection
Mechanical Brake at
Stop
Error PID feedback of
tension
Description
Active when continuous abnormalities occur during
automatically calculating reel diameter.
When drive stops, the corresponding multi-function terminal
will be ON if the output frequency is less than Pr.03-14. After
it is ON, it will be OFF when brake time exceeds Pr.03-15.
When the error between PID target value and PID feedback
exceeds Pr.10-63 and allowance error detection time of
tension PID feedback exceeds Pr.10-64, please refer to Pr.
10-65 for error treatment of tension PID feedback.
03 - 04 Desired Frequency Attained 1
Settings
Unit: 0.01
0.00 to 400.00Hz
Factory Setting: 0.00
03 - 10 Desired Frequency Attained 2
Settings
Unit: 0.01
0.00 to 400.00Hz
Factory Setting: 0.00
If a multi-function output terminal is set to function as Desired Frequency Attained 1 or 2
(Pr.03-00 to Pr.03-03 = 09 or 22), then the output will be activated when the programmed
frequency is attained.
F requenc y
master
2Hz
frequency
detec ti on range
desir ed
frequency waiting time
for
frequency
detec ti on
-2Hz range
DC brake time
during stop
OF F
ON
run/stop
master fr eq. attained
(output signal)
desir ed freq. attai ned
detec ti on
4Hz range
OF F
OF F
ON
ON
Time
OF F
OF F
setting 03 z ero s peed indication
ON
OF F
ON
setting 24 z ero s peed indication
ON
OF F
ON
ou tp ut t im ing ch art o f mu ltiple fun ctio n termin als
wh en settin g to freq uen cy att ain ed or zero speed ind ication
03 - 05 Analog Output Signal (AFM)
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Analog Frequency Meter (0 to Maximum Output Frequency)
01
Analog Current Meter (0 to 250% of rated AC motor drive current)
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-47
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
02
Output voltage (0 to Pr.01-02)
03
Output frequency command (0 to Maximum Frequency)
04
Output motor speed (0 to the Maximum Frequency)
05
Load power factor (cos90o to 0o)
This parameter sets the function of the AFM output 0~+10VDC (ACM is common).
03 - 06
Analog Output Gain
Settings
Unit: 1
01 to 200%
Factory Setting: 100
This parameter sets the voltage range of the analog output signal.
When Pr.03-05 is set to 0, the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output
frequency of the AC motor drive. With Pr.03-06 set to 100%, the Maximum Output Frequency
(Pr.01-00) of the AC motor drive corresponds to +10VDC on the AFM output.
Similarly, if Pr.03-05 is set to 1, the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output
current of the AC drive. With Pr.03-06 set to 100%, then 2.5 times the rated current
corresponds to +10VDC on the AFM output.
NOTE
Any type of voltmeter can be used. If the meter reads full scale at a voltage less than 10 volts,
the parameter 03-06 should be set using the following formula:
Pr. 03-06 = ((meter full scale voltage)/10) x 100%
For Example: When using the meter with full scale of 5 volts, adjust Pr.03-06 to 50%. If
Pr.03-05 is set to 0, then 5VDC will correspond to Maximum Output Frequency.
03 - 07
Digital Output Multiplying Factor
Settings
0.1 to 100.0 times
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 1.0
This parameter determines the multiplying factor for the AC drives digital output frequency at
the digital output terminals (DFM-DCM). The pulse frequency is equal to the AC motor drive
output frequency multiplied by Pr.03-07. (Pulse frequency = actual output frequency x Pr.03-07)
03 - 08
Terminal Count Value
Settings
00 to 65500
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 00
This parameter sets the count value of the internal counter. The external terminal TRG
increases the internal counter. Upon completion of counting, the specified output terminal will
be activated. (Pr.03-00 to Pr.03-03 set to 14).
5-48
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
When the display shows c5555, the drive has counted 5,555 times. If display shows c5555•, it
means that real counter value is between 55,550 to 55,559.
03 - 09
Preliminary Count Value
Settings
Unit: 1
00 to 65500
Factory Setting: 00
When the counter value reaches this value, the corresponding multi-function output terminal
will be activated, provided one of Pr.03-00 to Pr.03-03 set to 15 (Preliminary Count Value
Setting). This multi-function output terminal will be deactivated upon completion of Terminal
Count Value Attained.
The timing diagram:
2msec
Display
(Pr.00-04=01)
TRG
Counter Trigger
2msec
Preliminary Count Value
(Pr. 03-00~Pr. 03-03=15) Ex:03-08=5,03-09=3
The width of trigger signal
should not be less than
2ms(<250 Hz)
Terminal Count Value
(Pr. 03-00~Pr. 03-03=14)
03 - 11 EF Active when Preliminary Count Value Attained
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Preliminary count value attained, no EF display
01
Preliminary count value attained, EF active
If this parameter is set to 01 and the desired value of counter is attained, the AC drive will treat
it as a fault. The drive will stop and show the “cEF” message on the display.
03 - 12 Fan Control
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Fan always ON
01
1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
02
AC motor drive runs and fan ON, AC motor drive stops and fan
OFF
03
Fan ON to run when preliminary heatsink temperature attained
This parameter determines the operation mode of cooling fan.
03 - 13 Mechanical Brake Release Frequency
Settings
0.00 to 400.00Hz
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
5-49
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
03 - 14 Mechanical Brake Engage Frequency
Settings
0.00 to 400.00Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
These two parameters are used to set control of mechanical brake via the output terminals
(MO1~MO3) when Pr.03-00~03-03 is set to 29. Refer to the following example for details.
Example:
1. Case 1: Pr.03-14 ≥ Pr.03-13
2. Case 2: Pr.03-14 ≤ Pr.03-13
Frequency
Output
Case 1: Pr.03-14
Pr. 03-13
Case 2: Pr.03-14
Time
Run/Stop
Case 1: MOX=29
Case 2: MOX=29
Note: MOX: setting value of Pr.03-00~Pr.03-03
03 - 15 Mechanical Brake Engage Time at Stop
Settings
0.0 to 600.0 sec
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 5.0
When drive stops, the corresponding multi-function terminal will be ON if the output frequency
is less than Pr.03-14. After it is ON, it will be OFF when brake time exceeds Pr.03-15.
5-50
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Timing chart for mechanical brake at stop:
frequency
Pr03-14
Pr03-15
MOX=35
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-51
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Group 04: Input Function Parameters
04 - 00
AVI Analog Input Bias
Settings
0.00 to 200.00%
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
04 - 01 AVI Bias Polarity
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
04 - 02
00
Positive Bias
01
Negative Bias
AVI Input Gain
Settings
Unit: 1
1 to 200%
Factory Setting: 100
04 - 03 AVI Negative Bias, Reverse Motion Enable/Disable
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
04 - 11
00
No AVI Negative Bias Command
01
Negative Bias: REV Motion Enabled
02
Negative Bias: REV Motion Disabled
ACI Analog Input Bias
Settings
0.00 to 200.00%
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
04 - 12 ACI Bias Polarity
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
04 - 13
00
Positive Bias
01
Negative Bias
ACI Input Gain
Settings
Unit: 1
01 to 200%
Factory Setting: 100
04 - 14 ACI Negative Bias, Reverse Motion Enable/Disable
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
04 - 15
00
No ACI Negative Bias Command
01
Negative Bias: REV Motion Enabled
02
Negative Bias: REV Motion Disabled
AUI Analog Input Bias
Settings
0.00 to 200.00%
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
04 - 16 AUI Bias Polarity
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
04 - 17
Positive Bias
01
Negative Bias
AUI Input Gain
Settings
5-52
00
01 to 200%
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
04 - 18 AUI Negative Bias, Reverse Motion Enable/Disable
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
No AUI Negative Bias Command
01
Negative Bias: REV Motion Enabled
02
Negative Bias: REV Motion Disabled
In a noisy environment, it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin.
Pr.04-00 ~ 04-03, Pr.04-11 ~ 04-18 are used when the source of frequency command is the
analog signal. Refer to the following examples.
Example 1: Standard application
This is the most used setting. The user only needs to set Pr.02-00 to 01, 02 or 03. The frequency
command comes from external potentiometer/current signal on AVI, ACI or AUI.
60Hz
Pr.01-00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
AVI
ACI
AUI
Pr.04-00 Pr.04-11 Pr.04-15=0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04-01 Pr.04-12 Pr.04-16=0--Positive bias
Pr.04-02 Pr.04-13 Pr.04-17=100%--Input gain
Pr.04-03 Pr.04-14 Pr.04-18=0No negative bias command
30Hz
0Hz
0V
4mA
5V
12mA
10V
20mA
Example 2: Use of bias
This example shows the influence of changing the bias. When the input is 0V (4mA) the output
frequency is 10 Hz. At mid-point a potentiometer will give 40 Hz. Once the Maximum Output
Frequency is reached, any further increase of the potentiometer or signal will not increase the output
frequency. (To use the full potentiometer range, please refer to Example 3.) The value of external
input voltage/current 0-8.33V (4-17.33mA) corresponds to the setting frequency 10-60Hz.
Pr.01-00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
AVI
ACI
AUI
Pr.04-00 Pr.04-11 Pr.04-15=16.7%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04-01 Pr.04-12 Pr.04-16=0--Positive bias
Pr.04-02 Pr.04-13 Pr.04-17=100%--Input gain
Pr.04-03 Pr.04-14 Pr.04-18=0--No negative bias command
60Hz
40Hz
10Hz
Bias
Adjustment
0Hz 0V
4mA
Gain:100%
5V
12mA
10V Bias adjustment:((10Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=16.7%
20mA
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-53
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Example 3: Use of bias and gain for use of full range
This example also shows a popular method. The whole scale of the potentiometer can be used as
desired. In addition to signals of 0 to 10V and 4 to 20mA, the popular voltage signals also include
signals of 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA or any value under 10V. Regarding the setting, please refer to the
following examples.
Pr.01-00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
AVI
ACI
AUI
Pr.04-00 Pr.04-11 Pr.04-15=20.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04-01 Pr.04-12 Pr.04-16=0--Positive bias
Pr.04-02 Pr.04-13 Pr.04-17=83.3%--Input gain
Pr.04-03 Pr.04-14 Pr.04-18=0--No negative bias command
60Hz
Bias 10Hz
Adjustment
0Hz0V
-2V
XV 4mA
Gain:(10V/(10V+2V))*100%=83.3%
5V
12mA
10V Bias adjustment:((10Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=20.0%
20mA
Example 4: Use of 0-5V potentiometer range via gain adjustment
This example shows a potentiometer range of 0 to 5 Volts. Instead of adjusting gain as shown in the
example below, you can set Pr. 01-00 to 120Hz to achieve the same results.
Gain
adjustment
60Hz
30Hz
Pr.01-00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
AVI
AUI
Pr.04-00 Pr.04-15=0.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04-01 Pr.04-16=0--Positive bias
Pr.04-02 Pr.04-17=200%--Input gain
Pr.04-03 Pr.04-18=0--No negative bias command
Gain:(10V/5V)*100%=200%
0Hz 0V
5V
10V
Example 5: Use of negative bias in noisy environment
In this example, a 1V negative bias is used. In noisy environments it is advantageous to use negative
bias to provide a noise margin (1V in this example).
Pr.01-00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
AVI
AUI
Pr.04-00 Pr.04-15=10.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04-01 Pr.04-16=1--Negative bias
Pr.04-02 Pr.04-17=100%--Input gain
Pr.04-03 Pr.04-18=0--No negative bias command
60Hz
54Hz
0Hz
Negative
0V 1V
bias 6Hz
5-54
Gain:100%
10V
Bias adjustment:((6Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=10.0%
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Example 6: Use of negative bias in noisy environment and gain adjustment to use full
potentiometer range
In this example, a negative bias is used to provide a noise margin. Also a potentiometer frequency
gain is used to allow the Maximum Output Frequency to be reached.
Bias
adjustment Pr.01-00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
AVI
AUI
Pr.04-00 Pr.04-15=10.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04-01 Pr.04-16=1--Negative bias
Pr.04-02 Pr.04-17=111%--Input gain
Pr.04-03 Pr.04-18=0--No negative bias command
60Hz
0Hz
Negative
0V 1V
bias 6.6Hz
Gain:(10V/9V)*100%=111%
10V
Bias adjustment:((6.6Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=10.0%
Example 7: Use of 0-10V potentiometer signal to run motor in FWD and REV direction
In this example, the input is programmed to run a motor in both forward and reverse direction. The
motor will be idle when the potentiometer position is at mid-point of its scale. Using this example will
disable the external FWD and REV controls.
60Hz
30Hz
FWD
0V 0Hz
REV
5V
10V
30Hz
60Hz
Pr.01-00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
AVI
AUI
Pr.04-00 Pr.04-15=50.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04-01 Pr.04-16=1--Negative bias
Pr.04-02 Pr.04-17=200%--Input gain
Pr.04-03 Pr.04-18=1--Negative bias: REV motion enabled
Gain:(10V/5V)*100%=200%
Bias adjustment:((60Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=200%
Example 8: Use negative slope
In this example, the use of negative slope is shown. Negative slopes are used in applications for
control of pressure, temperature or flow. The sensor that is connected to the input generates a large
signal (10V or 20mA) at high pressure or flow. With negative slope settings, the AC motor drive will
slow stop the motor. With these settings the AC motor drive will always run in only one direction
(reverse). This can only be changed by exchanging 2 wires to the motor.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-55
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
60Hz
Pr.01-00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
AVI
ACI
AUI
Pr.04-00 Pr.04-11 Pr.04-15=100%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04-01 Pr.04-12 Pr.04-16=0--Positive bias
Pr.04-02 Pr.04-13 Pr.04-17=100%--Input gain
Pr.04-03 Pr.04-14 Pr.04-18=1--Negative bias: REV motion enabled
negative slope
Gain:(10V/10V)*100%=100%
0Hz
0V
4mA
10V
Bias adjustment:((60Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=100%
20mA
04 - 19 AVI Analog Input Delay
Settings
0.00 to 10.00 sec
04 - 20 ACI Analog Input Delay
Settings
0.00 to 10.00 sec
04 - 21 AUI Analog Input Delay
Settings
0.00 to 10.00 sec
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.05
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.05
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.05
These input delays can be used to filter noisy analog signals.
04 - 22 Analog Input Frequency Resolution
Factory Setting: 01
Settings
00
0.01Hz
01
0.1Hz
It is used to set the unit of the resolution of frequency command when the input source is an
analog signal.
04 - 04 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI1)
Factory Setting: 01
04 - 05 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI2)
Factory Setting: 02
04 - 06 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3)
Factory Setting: 03
04 - 07 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4)
Factory Setting: 04
04 - 08 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5)
Factory Setting: 05
04 - 09 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6)
Settings
5-56
00~40
Factory Setting: 06
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Settings
Function
Description
Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to
insure they have no effect on operation.
00
No Function
01
Multi-Step Speed Command 1 These four inputs select the multi-speed defined by
Pr.05-00 to Pr.05-14 as shown in the diagram at the end
of this table.
Multi-Step Speed Command 2
NOTE: Pr.05-00 to Pr.05-14 can also be used to
control output speed by programming the AC motor
Multi-Step Speed Command 3
drive’s internal PLC function. There are 17 step
speed frequencies (including Master Frequency and
Multi-Step Speed Command 4 Jog Frequency) to select for application.
02
03
04
05
External Reset (N.O.)
The External Reset has the same function as the Reset
key on the Digital keypad. After faults such as O.H.,
O.C. and O.V. are cleared this input can be used to
reset the drive.
06
Accel/Decel Inhibit
When the command is active, acceleration and
deceleration is stopped and the AC motor drive
maintains a constant speed.
07
Accel/Decel Time Selection
Command 1 for Accel/Decel
Time 1/2
08
Accel/Decel Time Selection
Command 2 for Accel/Decel
Time 3/4
09
External Base Block (N.O.)
(Refer to Pr. 08-06)
10
External Base Block (N.C.)
(Refer to Pr. 08-06)
11
UP: Increment Master
Frequency
12
DOWN: Decrement Master
Frequency
13
Counter Reset
When active, the counter is reset and inhibited. To
enable counting the input should be OFF. Refer to Pr.0308 and 03-09.
14
Run PLC Program
To run the AC motor drive internal PLC program.
NOTE: Pr.05-00 to Pr.05-16 define the PLC program.
15
Pause PLC Program
When the PLC program runs, a Multi-Function Input
Terminal, when set to 15, can be used to pause the PLC
program.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Used to select the one of four Accel/Decel Times (Pr.0109 to Pr.01-12, Pr.01-18 to Pr.01-21). See explanation at
the end of this table.
Parameter values 9, 10 program Multi-Function Input
Terminals for external Base Block control.
NOTE: When a Base-Block signal is received, the AC
motor drive will block all output and the motor will
free run. When base block control is deactivated, the
AC drive will start its speed search function and
synchronize with the motor speed, and then
accelerate to Master Frequency.
Increment/decrement the Master Frequency each time
an input is received or continuously when the input stays
active. When both inputs are active at the same time, the
Master Frequency increment/decrement is halted. Please
refer to Pr.02-08, 02-09. This function is also called
“motor potentiometer”.
5-57
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Settings
Function
Description
16
Auxiliary Motor No.1 output
disable
17
Auxiliary Motor No.2 output
disable
18
Auxiliary Motor No.3 output
disable
19
Emergency Stop (N.O.)
20
Emergency Stop (N.C.)
21
Master Frequency Selection
AVI/ACI
ON: ACI
OFF: AVI
Pr.02-00 and Pr.02-13 are disabled if this parameter
value 21 is set. See the explanation below the table.
22
Master Frequency Selection
AVI/AUI
ON: AUI
OFF: AVI
Pr.02-00 and Pr.02-13 are disabled if this parameter
value 22 is set. See the explanation below the table.
23
Operation Command
Selection (keypad
PU01/external terminals)
ON: Operation command via external terminals
OFF: Operation command via keypad PU01
Pr.02-01 and Pr.02-14 are disabled if this parameter
value 23 is set. See the explanation below the table.
24
Auto accel/decel mode
disable
ON: Linear accel/decel (Auto accel/decel mode set by
Pr.01-15 disabled)
OFF: Auto accel/decel mode
25
Forced Stop (N.C.)
26
Forced Stop (N.O.)
27
Parameter lock enable (N.C.)
When this setting is enabled, all parameters will be
locked and write parameters are disabled.
28
PID function disabled
When the input is ON for this setting, the PID function will
be disabled.
29
Jog FWD/REV command
ON: REV
OFF: FWD
This command will be effective only when external
terminal JOG is active.
30
External Reset (N.C.)
The function is the same as setting 05 but for use with
normally close contact.
31
Source of second frequency
command enabled
Used to select the first/second frequency command
source. Refer to Pr.02-00 and 02-13.
ON: 2nd Frequency command source
OFF: 1st Frequency command source
5-58
Parameter value 16 to 18 program Multi-Function Input
Terminal to disable the corresponding auxiliary motor via
the AC motor drive Multi-function Output Terminals
Pr.03-00 to 3-03 (Relay and MO1 to MO3) when set to
16-18.
When set to 19 or 20, the Multi-Function Input Terminal
can be used to stop the AC motor drive in case of
malfunction in the application. It will display “EF1”.
Please “RESET” after the fault has been cleared.
Refer to Pr.02-02 for Stop Method.
These two parameters have the same function as the
“STOP” command with stop method according to
Pr.02-02. No error message is displayed. When
parameter value 25 or 26 is enabled, a new RUN
command is needed.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Settings
Function
Description
32
Source of second operation
command enabled
Used to select the first/second operation command
source. Refer to Pr.02-01 and 02-14.
ON: 2nd Operation command source
OFF: 1st Operation command source
33
One shot PLC
The function is the same as setting 14 but the trigger
signal is a one shot pulse, for example: a push button
input. It can be cancelled by a “STOP” command.
34
Proximity sensor input for
simple Index function
This function should be used with Pr.04-23 ~ Pr.04-25.
35
Output Shutoff Stop (N.O.)
AC motor drive will stop output and the motor free run if
one of these settings is enabled. If the status of terminal
is changed, AC motor drive will restart from 0Hz.
36
Output Shutoff Stop (N.C.)
37
Initial Reel Diameter Selection When parameter value 37 is enabled, current reel
0
diameter will be reset to the setting specified in Pr.10-47.
38
Initial Reel Diameter Selection When parameter value 38 is enabled, current reel
1
diameter will be reset to the setting specified in Pr.10-48.
39
Initial Reel Diameter
Command
When parameter value 39 is enabled, current reel
diameter will be reset to the setting specified in Pr.10-46
~ 10-48.
40
Clear PID control integration
of tension (N.O.)
When parameter value 40 is enabled, PID control
integration of tension will be cleared.
N.O.= Normally Open.
N.C.= Normally Closed.
When parameter value 21 and 22 are set and these two terminals are ON, the priority of
analog input signals are AVI > ACI > AUI.
Frequency
Master
Freq.
Accel time 4
01-20
Decel time 1
01-10
Acceleration
Delceleration
Decel time 2
01-12
Accel time 3
01-18
Accel time 2
01-11
Decel time 3
01-19
Decel time 4
01-21
Accel time 1
01-09
RUN/STOP
PU External terminal
communication
Accel/Decel time 1 & 2
Multi-function Input
Terminals Pr.04-04 to
Pr.04-09(MI1 to MI6 7)
Accel/Decel time 3 & 4
Multi-function Input
Terminals Pr.04-04 to
Pr.04-09(MI1 to MI6 8)
1
2
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
1
4
1
2
3
4
Time
ON
ON
ON
ON
Accel/Decel Time and Multi-function Input Terminals
5-59
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
MI2=08
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Accel/decel time 1
Accel/decel time 2
Accel/decel time 3
Accel/decel time 4
MI1=07
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
05-07
Frequency
05-06
05-08
05-05
05-09
05-04
05-10
05-03
05-11
05-02
05-12
05-01
JOG Freq.
01-14
05-13
05-00
05-14
Master Speed
Multi-function
terminals
MI1~MI6
04-04~04-09
Run/Stop
PU/external terminals
/communication
1st speed
(MI1 to MI6 1)
2nd speed
(MI1 to MI6 2)
3rd speed
(MI1 to MI6 3)
4th speed
(MI1 to MI6 4)
Jog Freq.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15
ON
OFF ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Multi-speed via External Terminals
5-60
MI4=4
MI3=3
MI2=2
MI1=1
Master frequency
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1st speed
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2nd speed
3rd speed
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
4th speed
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
5th speed
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
6th speed
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
7th speed
8th speed
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
9th speed
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
10th speed
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
11th speed
ON
OFF
ON
ON
12th speed
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
13th speed
14th speed
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
15th speed
ON
ON
ON
ON
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
04 - 10 Digital Terminal Input Debouncing Time
Settings
Unit: 2
01 to 20 msec
Factory Setting: 1
This parameter is to delay the signals on digital input terminals. 1 unit is 2 msec, 2 units are 4
msec, etc. The delay time is used to debounce noisy signals that could cause the digital
terminals to malfunction.
04 - 23 Gear Ratio for Simple Index Function
Settings
Unit: 1
4 to 1000
Factory Setting: 200
04 - 24 Index Angle for Simple Index Function
Settings
Unit: 0.1
0.0 to 360.0°
Factory Setting: 180.0
04 - 25 Deceleration Time for Simple Index Function
Settings
Unit: 0.01
0.00 to 100.00 sec
Factory Setting: 0.00
The simple index function is used to position the machine/motor at the same position when it
stops. The function should be used with setting 34 for Multi-Function Input Terminals (Pr.04-04
to 04-09).
The function diagram is shown below. The machine is driven by a gear motor or other
reduction gearbox. The trigger position of the proximity sensor is used as the starting point of
the index angle. When the stop command is initiated, the AC motor drive will not decelerate
until the proximity sensor is triggered. After that, the AC motor drive begins to decelerate and
stop according to the Pr.04-24 and Pr.04-25.
Frequency
STOP Command
Proximity Sensor Actives
Time
Signal of Zero
: time between STOP and triggering by proximity
sensor. It depends on the moment the STOP
command is given.
=Pr.04-25
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-61
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Group 05: Multi-step speeds and PLC (Process Logic Control) parameters
05 - 00
1st Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 01
2nd Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 02
3rd Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 03
4th Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 04
5th Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 05
6th Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 06
7th Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 07
8th Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 08
9th Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 09
10th Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 10
11th Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 11
12th Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 12
13th Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 13
14th Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
05 - 14
15th Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00 to 400.00 Hz
The Multi-Function Input Terminals (refer to Pr.04-04 to 04-09) are used to select one of the
AC motor drive Multi-step speeds. The speeds (frequencies) are determined by Pr.05-00 to
05-14 as shown above. They are also used in conjunction with Pr.05-15 to 05-31 for PLC
programs.
05 - 15 PLC Mode
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Disable PLC operation
01
Execute one program cycle
02
Continuously execute program cycles
03
Execute one program cycle step by step
04
Continuously execute program cycles step by step
This parameter selects the mode of PLC operation for the AC motor drive. The AC motor drive
will change speeds and directions according to the desired user programming.
This parameter can be applied in the PLC operation of general small machines, food
processing machines and washing equipment.
5-62
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Example 1 (Pr.05-15 = 1): Execute one cycle of the PLC program. The parameter settings are:
1.
Pr.05-00 to 05-14: 1st to 15th speed (sets the frequency of each speed)
2.
Pr.04-04 to 04-09: Multi-Function Input Terminals (set one multi-function terminal as 14 - PLC
auto-operation).
3.
Pr.03-00 to 03-03: Multi-Function Output Terminals (set a Multi-Function Terminal as 10-PLC
running indication, 11-PLC step completed and/or 12-PLC program completed).
4.
Pr.05-15: PLC mode setting.
5.
Pr.05-16: Direction of operation for the 1st to 15th speed.
6.
Pr.05-17 to 05-31: Operation time setting of the 1st to 15th speed.
05-07
Frequency
05-06
05-08
05-05
05-09
05-04
05-10
05-03
05-11
05-02
05-12
05-01
05-13
05-00
1
05-14
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 13 14
15
05-19
05-25 05-27
05-29
05-17
05-21 05-23
05-31
multi-function input terminals
05-30
05-18 05-20
05-22
05-24
05-26
05-28
ON
Program operation OFF
command
multi-function output terminals
ON
Program operation OFF
indication
Step operation indication
multi-function output terminals OFF
Time
Program operation fulfillment indication
multi-function input terminals OFF
NOTE
The above diagram shows one complete PLC cycle. To restart the cycle, turn the PLC program off
and on again.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-63
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Example 2 (Pr.05-15 = 2): Continuously execute program cycles:
The diagram above shows the PLC program stepping through each speed. Setting Pr.05-15 to 2
continuously executes the program. To stop the PLC program, one must either pause the program or
turn it off. (Refer to Pr.04-04 to 04-09 values 14 and 15).
Example 3 (Pr.05-15 = 3) Execute one cycle step by step:
The example below shows how the PLC can perform one cycle at a time, within a complete cycle.
Each step will use the accel/decel times in Pr.01-09 to Pr.01-12. Note that the actual time each step
stays at its intended frequency is reduced, due to the time for accel/decel.
Frequency
PLC operation execution one cycle step by step
05-03
05-02
05-01
05-00
1
05-17
Program operation
command
OFF
Program operation
indication
OFF
2
t
05-18
3
t
05-19
4
t
Time
05-20
ON
ON
ONON
ON
Step operation
OFF
indication
05 - 16 PLC Forward/Reverse Motion
Settings
00 to 32767
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 00
This parameter controls the direction of motion for the Multi-Step Speeds Pr.05-00 to Pr.05-14
during PLC mode. All other direction commands are invalid during the PLC mode.
NOTE
The equivalent 15-bit number is used to program the forward/reverse motion for each of the 15 speed
steps. The binary notation for the 15-bit number must be translated into decimal notation and then
entered.
5-64
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Weights
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0=Forward
1=Reverse
Direction of 1st speed for Pr.05-00
Direction of 2nd speed for Pr.05-01
Direction of 3rd speed for Pr.05-02
Direction of 4th speed for Pr.05-03
Direction of 5th speed for Pr.05-04
Direction of 6th speed for Pr.05-05
Direction of 7th speed for Pr.05-06
Direction of 8th speed for Pr.05-07
Direction of 9th speed for Pr.05-08
Direction of 10th speed for Pr.05-09
Direction of 11th speed for Pr.05-10
Direction of 12th speed for Pr.05-11
Direction of 1 3th speed for Pr.05-12
Direction of 14th speed for Pr.05-13
Direction of 15th speed for Pr.05-14
Weights
Bit
0
1
0
0
1 1
0 0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0=Forward
1=Reverse
Direction of Pr.05-00, 1st speed = Forward
Direction of Pr.05-01,2nd speed=Reverse
Direction of Pr.05-02 ,3rd speed=Forward
Direction of Pr.05-03 ,4th speed=Forward
Direction of Pr.05-04 ,5th speed=Reverse
Direction of Pr.05-05,6th speed=Reverse
Direction of Pr.05-06,7th speed=Reverse
Direction of Pr.05-07,8th speed=Forward
Direction of Pr.05-08,9th speed=Forward
Direction of Pr.05-09,10th speed=Forward
Direction of Pr.05-10,11th speed=Reverse
Direction of Pr.05-11,12th speed=Reverse
Direction of Pr.05-12, 13th speed=Forward
Direction of Pr.05-13,14th speed=Forward
Direction of Pr.05-14,15th speed=Reverse
The setting value
14
13
2
1
0
= bit14x2 + bit13x2 +....+bit2x2 +bit1x2 +bit0x2
14
11
10
6
5
4
1
= 1x2 + 1x2 +1x2 +1x2 +1x2 +1x2 +1x2
=16384+2048+1024+64+32+16+2 =19570
Setting 05-16
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
NOTE:
14
13
2 =16384 2 =8192
9
2 =512
4
2 =16
8
2 =256
3
2 =8
12
11
2 =4096
7
2 =128
2
2 =4
10
2 =2048
6
2 =64
1
2 =2
2 =1024
5
2 =32
0
2 =1
5-65
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
05 - 17 Time Duration of 1st Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 18 Time Duration of 2nd Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 19 Time Duration of 3rd Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 20 Time Duration of 4th Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 21 Time Duration of 5th Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 22 Time Duration of 6th Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 23 Time Duration of 7th Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 24 Time Duration of 8th Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 25 Time Duration of 9th Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 26 Time Duration of 10th Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 27 Time Duration of 11th Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 28 Time Duration of 12th Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 29 Time Duration of 13th Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 30 Time Duration of 14th Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
05 - 31 Time Duration of 15th Step Speed
Unit: 1 or 0.1sec (See Pr.05-32)
Settings
0.0 to 65500 sec
Factory Setting: 0.0
Pr.05-17 to Pr.05-31 correspond to operation time of each step speed defined by Pr.05-00 to
Pr.05-14. The maximum setting of 65500 seconds will be displayed as “t6550•”. If display
shows “t6550”, it means 6550 seconds.
If a parameter is set to “00” (0 sec), the corresponding step will be skipped. This is commonly
used to reduce the number of program steps.
05 - 32 Time Unit Settings
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
1 sec
01
0.1 sec
This parameter sets the time unit for Pr.05-17~Pr.05-31.
05 - 33 The Amplitude of Wobble Vibration
Settings
0.00 to 400.00 Hz
Factory Setting: 0.00
05 - 34 Wobble Skip Frequency
Settings
0.00 to 400.00 Hz
Factory Setting: 0.00
The frequency change will be as shown in the following diagram. These two parameters are
specific for textile machinery.
5-66
Frequency of Δ top point Fup= master frequency F + Pr.05-33 + Pr.05-34.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Frequency of Δ down point Fdown= master frequency F - Pr.05-33 - Pr.05-34.
Pr.05-33
Double
Pr. 05-34
Fup
Pr.01-09
Pr.01-11
Master
Frequency(F)
Pr.01-10
Pr.01-12
Fdown
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-67
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Group 06: Protection Parameters
06 - 00 Over-Voltage Stall Prevention
Settings 230V
Unit: 0.1
330.0 to 410.0V (for VFD-B series)
Factory Setting: 390.0
460V
660.0 to 820.0V
Factory Setting: 780.0
00
Disable Over-voltage Stall Prevention (with brake unit or brake resistor)
During deceleration, the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to
motor regeneration. When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will not decelerate
further and keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value
again.
Over-Voltage Stall Prevention must be disabled (Pr.06-00=00) when a brake unit or brake
resistor is used.
NOTE
With moderate inertia load, over-voltage stall prevention will not occur and the real deceleration time
will be equal to the setting of deceleration time. The AC drive will automatically extend the
deceleration time with high inertia loads. If the deceleration time is critical for the application, a brake
resistor or brake unit should be used.
high voltage at DC side
over-voltage
detection level
time
output
frequency
Frequency Held
Deceleration characteristic
when Over-Voltage Stall
Prevention enabled
time
previous deceleration time
actual time to decelerate to stop when over-voltage
stall prevention is enabled
5-68
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
06 - 01 Over-Current Stall Prevention during Acceleration
Settings
Unit: 1
20 to 250%
Factory Setting: 170
A setting of 100% is equal to the Rated Output Current of the drive.
During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value
specified by Pr.06-01 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this
function is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant
until the current drops below the maximum value.
06-01
Over-Current
Detection
Level
output current
setting
frequency
Over-Current Stall
prevention during
Acceleration,
frequency held
Output
Frequency
time
previous acceleration time
actual acceleration time when over-current stall
prevention is enabled
06 - 02 Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation
Settings
Unit: 1
20 to 250%
Factory Setting: 170
If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06-02 when the drive is operating, the
drive will decrease its output frequency to prevent the motor stall. If the output current is lower
than the setting specified in Pr.06-02, the drive will accelerate again to catch up with the set
frequency command value.
Over-Current
Detection
Level
06-02
Over-Current Stall
Prevention during
Operation, output
frequency decrease
Output Current
Output
Frequency
over-current stall prevention during operation
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-69
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
06 - 03 Over-Torque Detection Mode (OL2)
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Over-Torque detection disabled.
01
Over-Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation.
After over-torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs.
02
Over-Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation.
After over-torque is detected, stop running.
03
Over-Torque detection enabled during acceleration. After overtorque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs.
04
Over-Torque detection enabled during acceleration. After overtorque is detected, stop running.
This parameter determines the operation mode of the drive after the over-torque (OL2) is
detected via the following method: if the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level
(Pr.06-04) longer than the setting of Pr.06-05 Over-Torque Detection Time, the warning
message “OL2” is displayed. If a Multi-Functional Output Terminal is set to over-torque
detection (Pr.03-00~03-03=04), the output is on. Please refer to Pr.03-00~03-03 for details.
06 - 04 Over-Torque Detection Level (OL2)
Settings
Unit: 1
10 to 200%
Factory Setting: 150
This setting is proportional to the Rated Output Current of the drive.
06 - 05 Over-Torque Detection Time (OL2)
Settings
0.1 to 60.0 sec
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.1
This parameter sets the time for how long over-torque must be detected before “OL2” is
displayed.
06 - 06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection (OL1)
Factory Setting: 02
Settings
00
Operate with a Standard Motor (self-cooled by fan)
01
Operate with a Special Motor (forced external cooling)
02
Operation disabled
This function is used to protect the motor from overloading or overheating.
06 - 07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic
Settings
30 to 600 sec
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 60
The parameter determines the time required for activating the I2t electronic thermal protection
function. The graph below shows I2t curves for 150% output power for 1 minute.
5-70
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Operation
time(min)
5
60Hz or more
4
50Hz
3
10Hz
2
5Hz
1
0
20 40 60
80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Load
factor (%)
06 - 08 Present Fault Record
06 - 09 Second Most Recent Fault Record
06 - 10 Third Most Recent Fault Record
06 - 11 Fourth Most Recent Fault Record
Factory Setting: 00
Readings
00
No fault
01
Over-current (oc)
02
Over-voltage (ov)
03
Overheat (oH)
04
Overload (oL)
05
Electronic thermal relay (oL1)
06
External fault (EF)
07
IGBT protection (occ)
08
CPU failure (cF3)
09
Hardware protection failure (HPF)
10
Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel.(ocA)
11
Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel.(ocd)
12
Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation
(ocn)
13
Ground fault (GFF)
14
Reserved
15
CPU WRITE failure (cF1)
16
CPU READ failure (cF2)
17
Reserved
18
Motor overload (oL2)
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-71
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
19
Auto accel/decel failure (CFA)
20
Software/password protection (codE)
21
Emergency stop (EF1)
22
Phase-Loss (PHL)
23
Preliminary count value attained, EF active (cEF)
24
Low current (Lc)
25
Analog feedback signal error (AnLEr)
26
PG feedback signal error (PGErr)
27
Motor overheat (oH9F)
28
Motor overheat warning (oH9L)
29
Fan Power Fault (FAnP)
30
Fan 1 Fault (FF1)
31
Fan 2 Fault (FF2)
32
Fan 3 Fault (FF3)
33
Fan 1, 2, 3 Fault (FFo)
34
Fan 1, 2 Fault (FF12)
35
Fan 1, 3 Fault (FF13)
36
Fan 2, 3 Fault (FF23)
37
Gate Drive Low Voltage Protect (Fv)
38
Error PID feedback of tension (rFbE)
39
Broken line detection of tension (rLbr)
In Pr.06-08 to Pr.06-11 the four most recent faults that occurred, are stored. After removing the
cause of the fault, use the reset command to reset the drive.
06 - 12 Low Current Detection Level
Settings
00 ~ 100%
00
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 00
Disabled
06 - 13 Low Current Detection Time
Settings
0.1 to 3600.0 sec
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 10.0
06 - 14 Low Current Detection Mode
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
5-72
00
Warn and keep operating
01
Warn and ramp to stop
02
Warn and coast to stop
03
Warn, after coast to stop, restart (delay 06-15 setting time)
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
06 - 15 Low Current Detection Restart Delay Time
Settings
1 to 600 min
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 10
If output current is lower than the setting Pr.06-12 for a time that exceeds Pr.06-13 setting
during operation, the AC drive will warn per Pr.06-14 setting. If Pr.06-14 is set to 03, the AC
drive will restart after the delay time set by Pr.06-15 is up.
06 - 16 User-Defined Low-Voltage Detection Level (Lv)
Settings
00
230V: 220 ~ 300VDC (for VFD-B series)
Factory Setting: 00
460V: 440 ~ 600VDC
Factory Setting: 00
06 - 17 User-Defined Low-Voltage Detection Time
Settings
Unit: 1
Disabled
0.1 to 3600.0 sec
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.5
When the DC BUS voltage is lower than the setting of Pr.06-16 for a time exceeding the
setting of Pr.06-17, the AC motor drive will output a signal when Pr.03-00 ~ Pr.03-03 is set to
28.
06 - 18 Reserved
06 - 19 User-Defined Low-Voltage Treatment
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
No action
01
EF active
06 - 20 Reserved
06 - 21 Reserved
06 - 22 Reserved
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-73
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Group 07: Motor Parameters
07 - 00
Motor Rated Current
Settings
Unit: 1
30 to 120%
Factory Setting: 100
Use the following formula to calculate the percentage value entered into this parameter:
(Motor Current / AC Drive Current) x 100%
with Motor Current=Motor rated current in A shown to motor nameplate
AC Drive Current=Rated current of AC drive in A (see Pr.00-01)
Pr.07-00 and Pr.07-01 must be set if the drive is programmed to operate in Vector Control
mode (Pr.0-09 = 2 or 3). They also must be set if the "Electronic Thermal Overload Relay"
(Pr.06-06) or "Slip Compensation" functions are selected.
07 - 01
Motor No-load Current
Settings
Unit: 1
01 to 90%
Factory Setting: 40
The rated current of the AC drive is regarded as 100%. The setting of the Motor no-load
current will affect the slip compensation.
The setting value must be less than Pr.07-00 (Motor Rated Current).
07 - 02
Torque Compensation
Settings
0.0 to 10.0
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
This parameter may be set so that the AC drive will increase its voltage output to obtain a
higher torque. Only to be used for V/f control mode.
Too high torque compensation can overheat the motor.
07 - 03
Slip Compensation (Used without PG)
Settings
0.00 to 3.00
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
While driving an asynchronous motor, increasing the load on the AC motor drive will cause an
increase in slip and decrease in speed. This parameter may be used to compensate the slip by
increasing the output frequency. When the output current of the AC motor drive is bigger than
the motor no-load current (Pr.07-01), the AC drive will adjust its output frequency according to
this parameter.
07 - 04 Number of Motor Poles
Settings
5-74
02 to 10
Unit: 2
Factory Setting: 04
This parameter sets the number of motor poles (must be an even number).
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
07 - 05 Motor Parameters Auto Tuning
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Disable
01
Auto Tuning R1 (Motor doesn’t run.)
02
Auto Tuning R1 + No-load Test (Motor runs.)
Start Auto Tuning by pressing RUN key after this parameter is set to 01 or 02.
When set to 01, it will only auto detect R1 value and Pr.07-01 must be input manually. When
set to 02, the AC motor drive should be unloaded and the values of Pr.07-01 and Pr.07-06 will
be set automatically.
The steps to AUTO-Tuning are:
1.
Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is
correct.
2.
Make sure the motor has no-load before executing auto-tuning and the shaft is not
connected to any belt or gear motor.
3.
Fill in Pr.01-01, Pr.01-02, Pr.07-00, Pr.07-04 and Pr.07-08 with correct values.
4.
After Pr.07-05 is set to 2, the AC motor drive will execute auto-tuning immediately after
receiving a ”RUN” command. (Note: The motor will run!). The total auto tune time will be
15 seconds + Pr.01-09 + Pr.01-10. Higher power drives need longer Accel/|Decel time
(factory setting is recommended). After executing, Pr.07-05 is set to 0.
5.
After successful execution, the drive will set Pr.07-01 and Pr.07-06 accordingly. If not,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
6.
Then you can set Pr.00-09 to 02/03 and set other parameters according to your
application requirement.
NOTE
1. In vector control mode it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel.
2. It is not recommended to use vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds the rated power of
the AC motor drive.
07 - 06 Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1
Settings
00 to 65535 mΩ
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 00
The motor auto tune procedure will set this parameter. The user may also set this parameter
without using Pr.07-05.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-75
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
07 - 07 Reserved
07 - 08 Motor Rated Slip
Settings
0.00 to 20.00Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 3.00
Refer to the rated rpm and the number of poles on the nameplate of the motor and use the
following equation to calculate the rated slip.
Rated Slip (Hz) = Fbase (Pr.01-01 base frequency) - (rated rpm x motor pole/120)
This parameter is valid only in vector mode.
07 - 09 Slip Compensation Limit
Settings
00 to 250%
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 200
This parameter sets the upper limit of the compensation frequency (the percentage of Pr.0708).
Example: when Pr.07-08=5Hz and Pr.07-09=150%, the upper limit of the compensation
frequency is 7.5Hz. Therefore, for a 50Hz motor, the max. output is 57.5Hz.
07 - 10 Reserved
07 - 11 Reserved
07 - 12 Torque Compensation Time Constant
Settings
0.01 to 10.00 sec
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.05
07 - 13 Slip Compensation Time Constant
Settings
0.05 to 10.00 sec
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.10
Setting Pr.07-12 and Pr.07-13 changes the response time for the compensation.
When Pr.07-12 and Pr.07-13 are set to 10.00 sec, its response time for the compensation will
be the longest. But if the settings are too short, unstable system may occur.
07 - 14 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min.)
Settings
00 to 1439
07 - 15 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Day)
Settings
00 to 65535
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 00
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 00
Pr.07-14 and Pr.07-15 are used to record the motor operation time. They can be cleared by
setting to 00 and it is not recorded when the motor operation time is less than 60 seconds.
5-76
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Group 08: Special Parameters
08 - 00 DC Brake Current Level
Settings
Unit: 1
00 to 100%
Factory Setting: 00
This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and
stopping. When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current (Pr.00-01) is regarded as 100%.
It is recommended to start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper
holding torque has been attained.
08 - 01 DC Brake Time during Start-up
Settings
Unit: 0.1
0.0 to 60.0 sec
Factory Setting: 0.0
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command. When
the time has elapsed, the AC motor drive will start accelerating from the Minimum Frequency
(Pr.01-05).
08 - 02 DC Brake Time during Stopping
Settings
Unit: 0.1
0.0 to 60.0 sec
Factory Setting: 0.0
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping. If stopping
with DC Brake is desired, Pr.02-02 Stop Method must be set to 00 or 02 for RAMP stop.
08 - 03 Start-Point for DC Brake
Settings
Unit: 0.01
0.00 to 400.00Hz
Factory Setting: 0.00
This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration.
Output Frequency
Start-Point for
DC Brake
Time during
Stopping
01-05
08-03
Minimum Output
Frequency
DC Brake Time
during Stopping
Run/Stop
ON
OFF
DC Brake during Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as
fans and pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in
position before setting it in motion.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-77
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
DC Brake during stopping is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load
in position. For high inertia loads, a dynamic brake resistor or brake unit may also be needed
for fast decelerations.
08 - 04 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Operation stops after momentary power loss.
01
Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search
starts with the Master Frequency reference value.
02
Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search
starts with the minimum frequency.
This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a
momentary power loss.
When using a PG card with PG (encoder), speed search will begin at the actual PG (encoder)
feedback speed and settings 01 and 02 will be invalid.
08 - 05 Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time
Settings
Unit: 0.1
0.1 to 5.0 sec
Factory Setting: 2.0
If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will
resume operation. If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time, the AC motor drive
output is then turned off (coast stop).
The selected operation after power loss in Pr.08-04 is only executed when the maximum
allowable power loss time is ≤5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays “Lu”.
But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum allowable power
loss time is ≤5 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr.08-04 is not executed. In that case it
starts up normally.
08 - 06 Baseblock Time for Speed Search (BB)
Settings
Unit: 0.1
0.1 to 5.0 sec
Factory Setting: 0.5
When momentary power loss is detected, the AC drive will block its output and then wait for a
specified period of time (determined by Pr.08-06, called Base-Block Time) before resuming
operation. This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration
voltage from the motors on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again.
This parameter also determines the waiting time before resuming operation after External
Baseblock and after Auto Restart Times after Fault (Pr.08-14).
5-78
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
When using a PG card with PG (encoder), speed search will begin at the actual PG (encoder)
feedback speed and settings 01 and 02 in Pr.08-04 will be invalid.
08 - 07 Current Limit for Speed Search
Settings
Unit: 1
30 to 200%
Factory Setting: 150
Following a momentary power loss, the AC motor drive will start its speed search operation
only if the output current is greater than the value set by Pr.8-07. When the output current is
less than the value of Pr.8-07, the AC motor drive output frequency is at “speed
synchronization point”. The drive will start to accelerate or decelerate back to the operating
frequency at which it was running prior to the power loss.
Maximum Allowable
Power Loss Time
Maximum Allowable
Power Loss Time
Power
Input
08-05
Speed Search
08-04=01
Output
Frequency
Baseblock Time
Speed
Synchronization
Detection
08-05
08-04=02
Baseblock Time
08-06
08-06
Output
Voltage
08 - 08 Skip Frequency 1 Upper Limit
Unit: 0.01
08 - 09 Skip Frequency 1 Lower Limit
Unit: 0.01
08 - 10 Skip Frequency 2 Upper Limit
Unit: 0.01
08 - 11 Skip Frequency 2 Lower Limit
Unit: 0.01
08 - 12 Skip Frequency 3 Upper Limit
Unit: 0.01
08 - 13 Skip Frequency 3 Lower Limit
Settings
0.00 to 400.00Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
These parameters set the Skip Frequencies. It will cause the AC motor drive to never remain
within these frequency ranges with continuous frequency output.
These six parameters should be set as follows Pr.08-08 ≥ Pr.08-09 ≥ Pr.08-10 ≥ Pr.08-11 ≥
Pr.08-12 ≥ Pr.08-13.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-79
internal frequency command
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
08-08
08-09
08-10
08-11
08-12
08-13
0
setting frequency
08 - 14 Auto Restart Times After Fault
Settings
00 to 10
00
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 00
Disable
Only after an over-current OC or over-voltage OV fault occurs, the AC motor drive can be
reset/restarted automatically up to 10 times.
Setting this parameter to 00 will disable the reset/restart operation after any fault has occurred.
When enabled, the AC motor drive will restart with speed search, which starts at the frequency
before the fault. To set the waiting time before restart after a fault, please set Pr. 08-06 Base
Block Time for Speed Search.
08 - 21 Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault
Settings
00 to 60000 sec
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 600
This parameter should be used in conjunction with Pr.08-14.
For example: If Pr.08-14 is set to 10 and Pr.08-21 is set to 600s (10 min), and if there is no
fault for over 600 seconds from the restart for the previous fault, the Auto Restart after Fault
will be reset to 10 times.
08 - 15 Automatic Energy-saving
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
5-80
00
Energy-saving operation disabled
01
Energy-saving operation enabled
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Output
Voltage
100%
70%
During auto-energy saving
operation, the output
voltage is lowered as much
as possible while maintaining
the load. Maximum output voltage
is 70% of the normal output voltage.
Output Frequency
08 - 16 Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR)
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
AVR function enabled
01
AVR function disabled
02
AVR function disabled for deceleration
The rated voltage of the motor is usually 200V/230VAC 50Hz/60Hz and the input voltage of
the AC motor drive may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50Hz/60Hz. Therefore, when the AC
motor drive is used without AVR function, the output voltage will be the same as the input
voltage. When the motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12% - 20%, its
lifetime will be shorter and it can be damaged due to higher temperature, failing insulation and
unstable torque output.
AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the Maximum
Output Voltage (Pr.01-02). For instance, if Pr.01-02 is set at 200 VAC and the input voltage is
at 200V to 264VAC, then the Maximum Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a
maximum of 200 VAC.
When motor stops with deceleration, it will shorten deceleration time. When setting this
parameter to 02 with auto acceleration/deceleration, it will offer a quicker deceleration.
08 - 17
Software Brake Level
(the Action Level of the Brake Resistor)
Settings
Unit: 1
230V series: 370 to 430V
Factory Setting: 380
460V series: 740 to 860V
Factory Setting: 760
This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-81
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
This parameter will be invalid for models above 15kW/20hp for which VFDB brake unit must be
used.
08 - 18 Base Block Speed Search
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Speed search starts with last frequency command
01
Speed search starts with minimum output frequency (Pr.01-05)
This parameter determines the AC motor drive restart method after External Base Block is
enabled.
Output frequency
(H)
Input B.B. signal
Output voltage(V)
Disable B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Waiting time 08-06
Output current A
08-07
Current limit for
speed search
Speed search
Synchronization speed detection
time
FWD Run
B.B.
Fig. 1: B.B. speed search with last output frequency downward timing chart
Output frequency
(H)
Input B.B. signal
Output voltage(V)
Disable B.B. signal
Output current
08-07
Current limit for
speed search
Stop output voltage
Waiting time 08-06
A
Speed search
Synchronization speed detection
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
Fig. 2: B.B. speed search with last output frequency downward timing chart
5-82
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Output frequency
(H)
Input B.B. signal
Output voltage(V)
Disable B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Waiting time 08-06
Output current
A
06-01
Over current
stall prevention
during acceleration
Restart
Stall prevention
Keep accelerating
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
Fig. 3: B.B. speed search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart
08 - 19 Speed Search during Start-up
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Speed search disable
01
Speed search enable
This parameter is used for starting and stopping a motor with high inertia. A motor with high
inertia will take a long time to stop completely. By setting this parameter, the user does not
need to wait for the motor to come to a complete stop before restarting the AC motor drive. If a
PG card and encoder is used on the drive and motor, then the speed search will start from the
speed that is detected by the encoder and accelerate quickly to the commanded frequency.
Pr.08-04 and Pr.08-06 will be disabled when using this parameter with PG feedback control.
CAUTION!
Please make sure Pr.07-04, Pr.10-10, and Pr.10-11 are set correctly. An incorrect setting may cause
the motor to exceed its speed limit and permanent damage to the motor and machine can occur.
08 - 20
Speed Search Frequency during Start-up
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Setting Frequency
01
Maximum Operation Frequency (01-00)
This parameter determines the start value of the speed search frequency.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-83
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
08 - 22
Compensation Coefficient for Motor Instability
Settings
00 to 1000
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 00
The drift current occurs in a specific zone and causes motor instability. By using this parameter,
motor instability greatly improves.
The drift current zone of the larger horsepower motor is usually in the low frequency range.
A setting of more than 500 is recommended.
5-84
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Group 09: Communication Parameters
There is a built-in RS-485 serial interface, marked RJ-11 (jack) is located near the control terminals.
The pins are defined below:
6
1
1: EV
2: GND
3: SG4: SG+
5: Reserved
6: Reserved
NOTE
1.
When connecting to the communication connector, please use RJ11 6P2C/6P4C
2.
When connecting to the PU, please use RJ12.
3.
Please notice that pin 1 is only for internal communication and external keypad. Please do not
use in other way to prevent drive malfunction or damage. For RS485 communication, please
only use pin 3 and pin 4.
Each VFD-BW AC drive has a pre-assigned communication address specified by Pr.09-00. The
RS485 master then controls each AC motor drive according to its communication address.
09 - 00
Communication Address
Settings
01 to 254
Factory Setting: 01
If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication
address for this drive must be set via this parameter. And the communication address for each
AC motor drive must be different and unique.
09 - 01
Transmission Speed
Factory Setting: 01
Settings
00
Baud rate 4800 bps (bits / second)
01
Baud rate 9600 bps
02
Baud rate 19200 bps
03
Baud rate 38400 bps
This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PLC, PC,
etc.) and AC motor drive.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-85
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
09 - 02
Transmission Fault Treatment
Factory Setting: 03
Settings
00
Warn and keep operating
01
Warn and RAMP to stop
02
Warn and COAST to stop
03
No warning and keep operating
This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur.
See list of error messages below (see section 3.6.)
09 - 03
Time-out Detection
Settings
0.0
Unit: 0.1
0.0 to 60.0 sec
Factory Setting: 0.0
Disable
If Pr.09-03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09-02=00~02, and there is no communication on the bus
during the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09-03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.
09 - 04
Communication Protocol
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,2>
01
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1>
02
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,1>
03
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2>
04
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,1>
05
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,1>
1. Control by PC or PLC
A VFD-BW can be set up to communicate on Modbus networks using one of the following modes:
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote Terminal Unit).
Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port communication protocol in Pr.09-04.
Code Description:
ASCII mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data: 64 Hex,
shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
5-86
Character
‘0’
‘1’
‘2’
‘3’
‘4’
‘5’
‘6’
‘7’
ASCII code
30H
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
36H
37H
Character
‘8’
‘9’
‘A’
‘B’
‘C’
‘D’
‘E’
‘F’
ASCII code
38H
39H
41H
42H
43H
44H
45H
46H
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
RTU mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. For example, 64 Hex.
2. Data Format
For ASCII mode:
( 7.N.2)
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
5
4
Stop Stop
bit
bit
6
7-bit character
10-bit character frame
( 7.E.1)
Start
bit
0
1
3
2
4
5
Even Stop
6
parity bit
7-bit character
10-bit character frame
( 7.O.1)
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
Odd
6
Stop
parity bit
7-bit character
10-bit character frame
For RTU mode:
( 8.N.2 )
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Stop Stop
bit
bit
6
7
Even Stop
parity bit
6
7
8-bit character
11-bit character frame
( 8.E.1 )
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
8-bit character
11-bit character frame
( 8.O.1 )
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
Odd
Stop
parity bit
8-bit character
11-bit character frame
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-87
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
3. Communication Protocol
3.1 Communication Data Frame:
ASCII mode:
STX
Address Hi
Address Lo
Function Hi
Function Lo
DATA (n-1)
to
DATA 0
LRC CHK Hi
LRC CHK Lo
END Hi
END Lo
Start character ‘:’ (3AH)
Communication address:
8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Command code:
8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes
Contents of data:
Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes
n<=20, maximum of 40 ASCII codes
LRC check sum:
8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes
End characters:
END Hi= CR (0DH), END Lo= LF(0AH)
RTU mode:
START
A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Address
Communication address: 8-bit address
Function
Command code: 8-bit command
DATA (n-1)
to
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
END
Contents of data:
n×8-bit data, n<=40 (20 x 16-bit data)
CRC check sum:
16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters
A silent interval of more than 10 ms
3.2 Address (Communication Address)
Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254. A communication address equal to 0,
means broadcast to all AC drives (AMD). In this case, the AMD will not reply any message to the
master device.
00H: broadcast to all AC drives
01H: AC drive of address 01
0FH: AC drive of address 15
10H: AC drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC drive of address 254
For example, communication to AMD with address 16 decimal (10H):
ASCII mode: Address=’1’,’0’ => ‘1’=31H, ‘0’=30H
RTU mode: Address=10H
5-88
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
3.3 Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)
The format of data characters depends on the function code.
03H: read data from register
06H: write single register
08H: loop detection
10H: write multiple registers
The available function codes and examples for VFD-BW are described as follows:
(1) 03H: multi read, read data from registers.
Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command message:
STX
Address
Function
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
LRC Check
END
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
‘2’
‘1’
‘0’
‘2’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
‘D’
‘7’
CR
LF
Response message:
STX
Address
Function
Number of data
(Count by byte)
Content of starting
address
2102H
Content of address
2103H
LRC Check
END
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
‘0’
‘4’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF
RTU mode:
Command message:
Address
Function
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
01H
03H
21H
02H
00H
02H
6FH
F7H
Response message:
Address
Function
Number of data
(count by byte)
Content of address
2102H
Content of address
2103H
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
01H
03H
04H
17H
70H
00H
00H
FEH
5CH
(2) 06H: single write, write single data to register.
Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-89
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
ASCII mode:
Command message:
STX
Address
Function
Data address
Data content
LRC Check
END
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘6’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF
Response message:
STX
Address
Function
Data address
Data content
LRC Check
END
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘6’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF
RTU mode:
Command message:
Address
Function
Data address
Data content
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
01H
06H
01H
00H
17H
70H
86H
22H
Response message:
Address
Function
Data address
Data content
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
01H
06H
01H
00H
17H
70H
86H
22H
(3) 08H: loop detection
This command is used to detect if the communication between master device (PC or PLC) and AC
motor drive is normal. The AC motor drive will send the received message to the master device.
ASCII mode:
Command message:
STX
Address
Function
Data address
Data content
5-90
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘8’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
Response message:
STX
Address
Function
Data address
Data content
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘8’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Command message:
LRC Check
END
Response message:
‘7’
‘0’
CR
LF
LRC Check
END
‘7’
‘0’
CR
LF
RTU mode:
Command message:
Address
Function
Data address
Data content
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
01H
08H
00H
00H
17H
70H
EEH
1FH
Response message:
Address
Function
Data address
Data content
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
01H
08H
00H
00H
17H
70H
EEH
1FH
(4) 10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers)
Example: Set the multi-step speed,
Pr.05-00=50.00 (1388H), Pr.05-01=40.00 (0FA0H). AC drive address is 01H.
ASCII Mode:
Command message:
STX
Address 1
Address 0
Function 1
Function 0
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
Number of data
(count by byte)
The first data
content
The second data
content
LRC Check
END
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘5’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
‘0’
‘4’
‘1’
‘3’
‘8’
‘8’
‘0’
‘F’
‘A’
‘0’
‘9’
Response message:
STX
Address 1
Address 0
Function 1
Function 0
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
LRC Check
END
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘5’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
‘E’
‘8’
CR
LF
‘A’
CR
LF
5-91
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
RTU mode:
Command message:
Address
Function
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
Number of data
(count by byte)
The first data
content
The second data
content
CRC Check Low
CRC Check High
01H
10H
05H
00H
00H’
02H
04
13H
88H
0FH
A0H
‘4D’
‘D9’
Response message:
Address
Function
Starting data address
Number of data
(count by word)
CRC Check Low
01H
10H
05H
00H
00H
02H
41H
CRC Check High
04H
3.4 Check sum
ASCII mode:
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, the values of
the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the
2’s-complement negation of the sum.
For example, reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H.
STX
Address 1
Address 0
Function 1
Function 0
Starting data address
Number of data
LRC Check 1
LRC Check 0
END 1
END 0
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
‘0’
‘4’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘F’
‘6’
CR
LF
01H+03H+04H+01H+00H+01H=0AH, the 2’s-complement negation of 0AH is F6H.
RTU mode:
5-92
Address
Function
01H
03H
Starting data address
21H
02H
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Number of data
(count by word)
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
00H
02H
6FH
F7H
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the
16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register.
Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero
filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right
with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H, then repeat
step 3.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete
8-bit byte will have been processed.
Step 6: Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing this
until all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value.
When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value
must be swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.
The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two
arguments:
Unsigned char* data Å a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length Å the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length){
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0xA001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-93
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
}
3.5 Address list
The contents of available addresses are shown as below:
Content
AC drive
Parameters
Address
GGnnH
Command
2000H
Write only
2001H
2002H
Status
monitor
Read only
5-94
2100H
Function
GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, for
example, the address of Pr 4-01 is 0401H. Referencing to
chapter 5 for the function of each parameter. When reading
parameter by command code 03H, only one parameter can be
read at one time.
Bit 0-1
00B: No function
01B: Stop
10B: Run
11B: Jog + Run
Bit 2-3
Reserved
Bit 4-5
00B: No function
01B: FWD
10B: REV
11B: Change direction
Bit 6-7
00B: Comm. forced 1st accel/decel
01B: Comm. forced 2nd accel/decel
10B: Comm. forced 3rd accel/decel
11B: Comm. forced 4th accel/decel
Bit 8-11
Represented 16 step speeds.
Bit 12
0: No comm. multi step speed or accel/decel time
1: Comm. multi step speed or accel/decel time
Bit 13-15
Reserved
Frequency command
Bit 0
1: EF (external fault) on
Bit 1
1: Reset
Bit 2-15
Reserved
Error code:
00: No error occurred
01: Over-current (oc)
02: Over-voltage (ov)
03: Overheat (oH)
04: Overload (oL)
05: Overload (oL1)
06: External fault (EF)
07: IGBT short circuit protection (occ)
08: CPU failure (cF3)
09: Hardware protection failure (HPF)
10: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel (ocA)
11: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel (ocd)
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Content
Address
2101H
2102H
2103H
2104H
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Function
12: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state
operation (ocn)
13: Ground Fault (GFF)
14: Low voltage (Lv)
15: EEPROM WRITE failure (cF1)
16: EEPROM READ failure (cF2)
17: Base Block
18: Overload (oL2)
19: Auto accel/decel failure (cFA)
20: Software protection enabled (codE)
21: Emergency stop (EF1)
22: Phase-Loss (PHL)
23: Preliminary count value attained, EF active (cEF)
24: Low current (Lc)
25: Analog feedback signal error (AnLEr)
26: PG feedback signal error (PGErr)
27: Motor overheat (oH9F)
28: Motor overheat warning (oH9L)
29: Fan Power Fault (FAnP)
30: Fan 1 Fault (FF1)
31: Fan 2 Fault (FF2)
32: Fan 3 Fault (FF3)
33: Fan 1, 2, 3 Fault (FFo)
34: Fan 1, 2 Fault (FF12)
35: Fan 1, 3 Fault (FF13)
36: Fan 2, 3 Fault (FF23)
37: Gate Drive Low Voltage Protect (Fv)
38: Error PID feedback of tension (rFbE)
39: Broken line detection of tension (rLbr)
Status of AC drive
LED: 0: light off, 1: light up
Bit 0-4
00: RUN LED
01: STOP LED
02: JOG LED
03: FWD LED
04: REV LED
Bit 5
0: F light off, 1: F light on
Bit 6
0: H light off, 1: H light on
Bit 7
0: “u” light off, 1: “u” light on
Bit 8
1: Master frequency Controlled by communication
interface
Bit 9
1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal
1: Operation command controlled by
Bit 10
communication interface
Bit 11
1: Parameters have been locked
Bit 12
0: AC drive stops, 1: AC drive operates
Bit 13
1: Jog command
Bit 14-15
Reserved
Frequency command (F)
Output frequency (H)
Output current (AXXX.X)
5-95
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Content
Address
2105H
2106H
2107H
2108H
2109H
210AH
210BH
210CH
210DH
210EH
210FH
2110H
2200H
2201H
2202H
2203H
2204H
2205H
2206H
Function
DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X)
Output voltage (EXXX.X)
Current Step number of Multi-Step Speed Operation
Remaining operation time of the current step in PLC program
Content of external TRIGGER
Power factor angle
Estimated torque ratio (XXX.X)
Motor speed (rpm)
PG pulse (low word) /unit time (Pr.10-15)
PG pulse (high word) /unit time (Pr.10-15)
Output power (kW)
Reserved
Feedback Signal (XXX.XX %)
User-defined (Low word)
User-defined (High word)
AVI analog input (XXX.XX %)
ACI analog input (XXX.XX %)
AUI analog input (XXX.XX %)
Display temperature of heatsink (°C)
3.6 Exception response:
The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages
from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to
the master device.
The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the AC
motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout condition.
The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot handle
them. An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message “CExx”
will be displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of “CExx” is a decimal code equal to the
exception code that is described below.
In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1, and an
exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned.
Example of an exception response of command code 06H and exception code 02H:
ASCII mode:
STX
Address Low
Address High
Function Low
Function High
Exception code
LRC CHK Low
LRC CHK High
END 1
END 0
5-96
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘8’
‘6’
‘0’
‘2’
‘7’
‘7’
CR
LF
RTU mode:
Address
Function
Exception code
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
01H
86H
02H
C3H
A1H
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
The explanation of exception codes:
Exception
code
01
02
03
04
10
Explanation
Illegal function code:
The function code received in the command message is not
available for the AC motor drive.
Illegal data address:
The data address received in the command message is not
available for the AC motor drive.
Illegal data value:
The data value received in the command message is not available
for the AC drive.
Slave device failure:
The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action.
Communication time-out:
If Pr.09-03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09-02=00~02, and there is no
communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period (set
by Pr.09-03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.
3.7 Communication program of PC:
The following is a simple example of how to write a communication program for Modbus ASCII
mode on a PC by C language.
#include<stdio.h>
#include<dos.h>
#include<conio.h>
#include<process.h>
#define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM1 */
/* the address offset value relative to COM1 */
#define THR 0x0000
#define RDR 0x0000
#define BRDL 0x0000
#define IER 0x0001
#define BRDH 0x0001
#define LCR 0x0003
#define MCR 0x0004
#define LSR 0x0005
#define MSR 0x0006
unsigned char rdat[60];
/* read 2 data from address 2102H of AC drive with address 1 */
unsigned char tdat[60]={':','0','1','0','3','2','1','0',’2', '0','0','0','2','D','7','\r','\n'};
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-97
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
void main(){
int i;
outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08);
outportb(PORT+IER,0x01);
/* interrupt enable */
/* interrupt as data in */
outportb(PORT+LCR,(inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80));
/* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7==1 */
outportb(PORT+BRDL,12);
/* set baudrate=9600, 12=115200/9600*/
outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00);
outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06);
/* set protocol, <7,N,2>=06H, <7,E,1>=1AH, <7,O,1>=0AH,
<8,N,2>=07H, <8,E,1>=1BH, <8,O,1>=0BH */
for(i=0;i<=16;i++){
while(!(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20)); /* wait until THR empty */
outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[i]);
/* send data to THR */
}
i=0;
while(!kbhit()){
if(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x01){ /* b0==1, read data ready */
rdat[i++]=inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data form RDR */
}
}
}
09 - 05 Reserved
09 - 06 Reserved
09 - 07
Response Delay Time
Settings
Unit: 2
00 to 200 msec
Factory Setting: 00
This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command
as shown in the following.
RS485 BUS
PC or PLC command
Response Message of AC Drive
Handling time
of AC drive
Max.: 6msec
5-98
Response Delay Time
Pr.09-07
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Group 10: PID Control
10 - 00 Input Terminal for PID Feedback
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Inhibit PID operation: external terminals AVI, ACI may be used for
frequency command if required (Pr.02-00).
01
Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC).
02
Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA).
03
Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC).
04
Positive PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA).
Note that the measured variable (feedback) controls the output frequency (Hz). Select input
terminal accordingly. Make sure this parameter setting does not conflict with the setting for
Pr.02-00 (Master Frequency).
When Pr.02-00 is set to 01 or 02, the set point (Master Frequency) for PID control is obtained
from the AVI/ACI external terminal (0 ~ +10V or 4 ~ 20mA) or from multi-step speed. When
Pr.02-00 is set to 00, the set point is obtained from the keypad.
Negative feedback means: +target value - feedback
Positive feedback means: -target value + feedback.
10 - 01 Gain Over the PID Detection Value
Settings
0.00 to 10.00
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 1.00
This is the gain adjustment over the feedback detection value. Refer to PID control block
diagram in Pr.10-06 for detail.
10 - 02
Proportional Gain (P)
Settings
0.0 to 10.0
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 1.0
This parameter specifies proportional control and associated gain (P). If the other two gains (I
and D) are set to zero, proportional control is the only one effective. With 10% deviation (error)
and P=1, the output will be P x10% x Master Frequency.
NOTE
The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning.
10 - 03
Integral Gain ( I )
Settings
Unit: 0.01
0.00 to 100.00 sec
0.00
Factory Setting: 1.00
Disable
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-99
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
This parameter specifies integral control (continual sum of the deviation) and associated gain
(I). When the integral gain is set to 1 and the deviation is fixed, the output is equal to the input
(deviation) once the integral time setting is attained.
NOTE
The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning.
10 - 04
Derivative Control (D)
Settings
0.00 to 1.00 sec
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
This parameter specifies derivative control (rate of change of the input) and associated gain
(D). With this parameter set to 1, the PID output is equal to differential time x (present
deviation − previous deviation). It increases the response speed but it may cause overcompensation.
NOTE
The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning.
10 - 05 Upper Bound for Integral Control
Settings
00 to 100 %
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100
This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the
Master Frequency.
The formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) x (Pr.10-05).
This parameter can limit the Maximum Output Frequency.
10 - 06 Primary Delay Filter Time
Settings
0.0 to 2.5 sec
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
To avoid amplification of measurement noise in the controller output, a derivative digital filter is
inserted. This filter helps to dampen oscillations.
The complete PID diagram is shown on the following page:
5-100
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Setpoint
P
I
10-02
10-03
+
-
Integral
gain
limit
+
Output
Freq.
Limit
+
10-07
+
10-05
Digital
filter
10-06
Freq.
Command
D
10-04
Input Freq.
Gain
PID
feedback
10-00
10-01
10 - 07 PID Output Frequency Limit
Settings
00 to 110 %
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100
This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The
formula is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) X Pr.10-07 %.
This parameter will limit the Maximum Output Frequency. An overall limit for the output
frequency can be set in Pr.01-07.
10 - 08 Feedback Signal Detection Time
Settings
0.0 to 3600.0 sec
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 60.0
This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a
warning (see Pr.10-09) is given. It also can be modified according to the system feedback
signal time.
If this parameter is set to 0.0, the system would not detect any abnormality signal.
10 - 09
Treatment of the Erroneous Feedback Signals (for PID and PG feedback error)
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Warning and keep operating
01
Warning and RAMP to stop
02
Warning and COAST to stop
AC motor drive action when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback or PG (encoder)
feedback) are abnormal according to Pr.10-16.
10 - 16 Deviation Range of PID Feedback Signal Error
Settings
0.00 to 100.00%
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 100.00
The base is Pr.01-00. When in PID feedback control, if | Source of PID reference target feedback | > Pr.10-16 and exceeds Pr.10-08 detection time, the AC drive will operate
according to Pr.10-09.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-101
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
10 - 17
Filter Time for PG Speed Feedback
Settings
Unit: 2 msec
0 to 500 (*2 msec)
Factory Setting: 0
10 - 10 PG Pulse Range
Settings
Unit: 1
00 to 40000 (Max=20000 for 2-pole motor)
Factory Setting: 600
A Pulse Generator (PG) or encoder is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the
motor speed. This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control.
For PG or encoder feedback an optional PG-card is needed.
10 - 11 PG Input
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Disable PG
01
Single phase
02
Forward / Counterclockwise rotation
03
Reverse / Clockwise rotation
The relationship between the motor rotation and PG input is illustrated below:
A phase leads B phase
A phase
FWD
CCW
REV
CW
PULSE
GENERATOR
10 - 12
10-11=02
B phase leads A phase
A phase
B phase
10-11=03
A phase
CW
B phase
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (with PG only) (P)
Settings
PG
B phase
0.0 to 10.0
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 1.0
This parameter specifies Proportional control and associated gain (P), and is used for speed
control with PG (encoder) feedback.
NOTE
The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning.
5-102
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
10 - 13
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (with PG only) (I)
Settings
Unit: 0.01
0.00 to 100.00
Factory Setting: 1.00
0.00 disable
This parameter specifies Integral control and associated gain (I), and is used for speed control
with PG (encoder) feedback.
NOTE
The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning.
10 - 14 Speed Control Output Frequency Limit
Settings
Unit: 0.01
0.00 to 100.00 Hz
Factory Setting: 10.00
This parameter limits the amount of correction by the PI control on the output frequency when
controlling speed via PG (encoder) feedback. It can limit the maximum output frequency.
10 - 15 Sample time for refreshing the content of 210DH and 210EH
Settings
0.01 to 1.00 sec
Factory Setting: 0.10
When the signal source of feedback control is PG (encoder) and it needs to read the pulse
numbers from communication, this parameter can be used to set the refresh time of two
communication addresses (210D and 210E).
Speed Control Diagram
Frequency
command
Speed
Detection
-
+
P
+
10-12
+
Output
Frequency
Limit
10-14
+
I
10-13
Speed Control Diagram
10 - 21 Tension Control Selection
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Disable
01
Closed-loop, speed mode
This parameter is used to enable/disable tension control.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-103
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
The tension control is disabled when this parameter is set to 00 and enabled when it is set to
01.
When tension control is enabled, firstly, master frequency is calculated by the line speed and
reel diameter, then the feedback tension signal (set in Pr.10-27) and tension target (set in
Pr.10-25) make a closed-loop PID control, so as to tune the output frequency of AC motor
drive.
Closed-loop, speed mode
10-25
&
10-26
+
Limit
PID output frequenc y
10-35=0 *1
+
PI
-
10-29 & 10-30
10-32 & 10-33
10-27
10-23 & 10-24
mechanical gear r ati o
reel diameter
line speed
output
frequency
+
10-35=1 *-1
master fr equenc y
Mo tor
Mo tor
te nsi on fee db a ck
AFM o r DF M
o pe rati on
comm an d
fre qu en cy
set tin g
MO=d 1
AI
li ne spe ed in pu t
AI or PG2
o pe rati on comma nd
FW D
FW D o r R EV
D ri ve 2
AI
D ri ve 1
In tension control mode, Pr.02-00/Pr.02-13 (Source of first/second master frequency command)
are disabled.
The formula for master frequency is: F=(V×P×G)/(120×π×D), where V: current line speed, P:
number of motor poles, G: mechanical gear ratio, D: reel diameter.
5-104
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
10 - 22
★ Wind Mode
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Rewind
01
Unwind
Rewind/unwind mode should be selected according to different occasions. The reel diameter
increases gradually in rewind mode, and decreases in unwind mode.
10 - 23 Mechanical Gear Ratio A (at motor side)
Settings
Unit: 1
1 to 65535
Factory Setting: 100
10 - 24 Mechanical Gear Ratio B (at load side)
Settings
Unit: 1
1 to 65535
Factory Setting: 100
Mechanical gear ratio G=mechanical gear ratio B/mechanical gear ratio A=Pr.10-24 / Pr.10-23.
The two parameters must be set correct in tension control.
Mechanical gear rat io B
(Pr.10-24)
Mechanical gear rat io A
(Pr.10-23)
Mo tor
Load
10 - 25 Source of Tension PID Target
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Parameter setting (defined by Pr.10-26)
01
Via analog input AVI
02
Via analog input ACI
03
Via analog input AUI
04
Via RS-485 serial communication (defined by Pr.10-26)
This parameter determines the reference value of tension detection signal in PID feedback
control.
10 - 26
★ Tension PID Target Value
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 50.0
When Pr.10-25 is set to 00/04, tension PID target value is defined by this parameter.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-105
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
10 - 27 Source of Tension PID Feedback
Factory Setting: 02
Settings
00
Via analog input AVI
01
Via analog input ACI
02
Via analog input AUI
This parameter is used to set the input channel for tension PID feedback.
10 - 28 Auto-tuning Tension PID
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Disable
01
Reel diameter (Pr.10-29 ~ 10-31 corresponds to Pr.10-44, Pr.10-32
~ 10-34 corresponds to Pr.10-43)
02
Frequency (Pr.10-29 ~ 10-31 corresponds to Pr.01-05, Pr.10-32 ~
10-34 corresponds to Pr.01-00)
This parameter is used to set the method of auto-tuning tension PID. For VFD-BW series AC
motor drive, there are two sets of PID parameters (Pr.10-29~10-31 and Pr.10-32~10-34),
which can be tuned with reel diameter or output frequency, and thus bring a better control
effect.
When this parameter is set to 00, PID parameters won’t tune. (fully controlled by P1, I1 and D1)
When this parameter is set to 01, two sets of PID parameters are used, where Pr.10-29 ~ 1031 corresponds to Pr.10-44; Pr.10-32 ~ 10-34 corresponds to Pr.10-43, they are linear.
P.I.D
10-29
10-30
10-32
10-33
0 Dmin
10-44
Dmax
10-43
reel
diameter
When this parameter is set to 02, two sets of PID parameters are used, where Pr.10-29 ~ 1031 corresponds to Pr.01-05; Pr.10-32 ~ 10-34 corresponds to Pr.01-00, they are linear.
5-106
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
P.I.D
10-29
10-30
10-32
10-33
0 F min
01-05
10 - 29
Tension PID P1
Settings
10 - 30
10 - 32
10 - 33
Factory Setting: 0.00
Unit: 0.1
0.0 to 1000.0%
Factory Setting: 50.0
Unit: 0.01
0.00 to 500.00 sec
Tension PID D2
Settings
Factory Setting: 1.00
Unit: 0.01
0.00 to 10.00 sec
Tension PID I2
Settings
10 - 34
0.00 to 500.00 sec
Tension PID P2
Settings
Factory Setting: 50.0
Unit: 0.01
Tension PID D1
Settings
output
frequency
Unit: 0.1
0.0 to 1000.0%
Tension PID I1
Settings
10 - 31
F max
01-00
Factory Setting: 1.00
Unit: 0.01
0.00 to 10.00 sec
Factory Setting: 0.00
10 - 35 Tension PID Feedback Method
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Negative PID feedback
01
Positive PID feedback
When it is set to 00, negative feedback means: +tension target value – tension feedback.
When it is set to 01, positive feedback means: -tension target value + tension feedback.
10 - 36 Tension PID Output Limit
Settings
0.00 to 100.00% (according to Pr.01-00)
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 20.00
This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during tension PID control.
The formula is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) X Pr.10-36 %.
This function aims to prevent integral saturation.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-107
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
10 - 37 Source of Line Speed Input Command
Factory Setting: 01
Settings
00
Disable
01
Via analog input AVI
02
Via analog input ACI
03
Via analog input AUI
04
Via RS-485 serial communication (Pr.10-41)
05
Pulse input
06
DFM-DCM pulse input
In tension control system, it is crucial to detect the line speed accurately. At present, there are
three sources for line speed signal:
‹ Analog Input (AVI, ACI, AUI)
The full-scale value of analog input corresponds to maximum line speed (set in Pr.10-38).
The most common way is to use AFM of master driver (rotation speed is in direct
proportion to line speed) as the line speed signal.
‹ Communication Setting
When it is set to 04, the current line speed can be directly input to Pr.10-41 via RS-485
communication.
‹ Pulse Input
Encoder can be used to detect the line speed or use DFM of master driver (rotation speed
is in direct proportion to line speed) as the line speed signal.
When it is set to 05, pulse signal needs to be input to PG03 through channel B and use
with Pr.10-40.
When it is set to 06, pulse signal needs to be input to PG03 through channel B and use
with Pr.03-07, which should be set equal to Pr.03-07 of master driver.
tractor
Wind
the setting of Pr.03-07 of driver 2
= the setting of digital output gain of driver 1
motor
Driver 1
TP
DF M
D FM
D CM
5-108
motor
Driver 2
(VFD-BW)
PG 0 3
A2
TP
/A2
B2
/B2
D CM AB2
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
10 - 38 Max. Line Speed
Settings
Unit: 0.1
0.0 to 3000.0 m/min.
Factory Setting: 1000.0
This parameter must be set correct according to actual circumstances, and it matches the
maximum value that Pr.10-37 (source of line speed input command) corresponds to.
10 - 39 Min. Line Speed
Settings
Unit: 0.1
0.0 to 3000.0 m/min.
Factory Setting: 0.0
When the line speed is detected lower than the setting of Pr.10-39, broken line detection will
be disabled.
10 - 40 Pulse Number for Each Meter
Settings
0.0 to 3000.0
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
When Pr.10-37 is set to 05 (pulse input is selected to calculate the line speed), the pulse
number for each meter needs to be set.
10 - 41
★ Current Line Speed
Settings
0.0 to 3000.0 m/min.
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
When Pr.10-37 is set to 04, the current line speed can be directly input to Pr.10-41 via RS-485
communication. In addition, the current line speed can be displayed by Pr.10-41.
10 - 42 Source of Reel Diameter
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Calculated by line speed
01
Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on rewind shaft.)
02
Via analog input AVI
03
Via analog input ACI
04
Via analog input AUI
05
Via RS-485 serial communication (Pr.10-54)
06
Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on motor.)
When it is set to 00, AC motor drive will automatically calculate the reel diameter according to
the line speed, line speed source is selected by Pr.10-37.
When it is set to 01, pulse signal is input to PG03 through channel B and reel diameter is got
from the settings of Pr.10-49, Pr.10-50 and Pr.10-51.
When it is set to 02, 03, 04, AImin=Dmin, AImax=Dmax.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-109
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
When it is set to 05, Pr.10-54 (current reel diameter) can be revised via RS-485
communication, but it cannot be revised when in operation.
When it is set to 06, to calculate reel diameter, Pr.10-23 and Pr.10-24 will be considered. For
other information, please refer to setting 01.
the path when
Pr.10- 42 is set to 01
proxi mity
switch/
encoder
gear ratio
Driv er
the path when
Pr.10- 42 is set to 06
Motor
Encoder
10 - 43 Max. Reel Diameter
Settings
Unit: 1
1 to 10000 mm
Factory Setting: 1000
During rewinding, when the reel diameter reaches Pr.10-43 setting, it will remain unchanged
and won’t be automatically calculated.
10 - 44 Empty Reel Diameter
Settings
Unit: 1
1 to 10000 mm
Factory Setting: 1
During unwinding, when the reel diameter reaches Pr.10-44 setting, it will remain unchanged
and won’t be automatically calculated.
10 - 45 Source of Initial Reel Diameter
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Via RS-485 serial communication (Pr.10-46)
01
Via analog input AVI
02
Via analog input ACI
03
Via analog input AUI
This parameter is used to initialize the reel diameter and it needs to be used with setting
37~39 of external multi-function input terminals (Pr.04-04~Pr.04-09).
When it is set to 00, a value is assigned to Pr.10-46 via RS-485 serial communication. And the
reel diameter is initialized to the value of Pr.10-46 by using with external multi-function input
terminals.
When it is set to 01, 02, 03, the reel diameter is initialized to AI current value by using with
external multi-function input terminals.
5-110
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
10 - 46 ★ Initial Reel Diameter 0
Unit: 1
10 - 47 Initial Reel Diameter 1
Unit: 1
10 - 48 Initial Reel Diameter 2
Unit: 1
Settings
1 to 10000 mm
Factory Setting: 1
Corresponding function
of multi-function input
terminal
Status 1
Status 2
Status 3
Status 4
37 Initial Reel
Diameter Selection 0
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
38 Initial Reel
Diameter Selection 1
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
After initialization,
Pr.10-54=?
10-46
10-47
10-48
Setting
Setting
Setting
Invalid
10 - 49 Number of Pulse per Revolution
Settings
1 to 10000
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 1
This parameter is used to set the number of pulse per revolution for rewind shaft. When
integrating thickness is selected as source of reel diameter, the reel diameter is calculated
according to this parameter.
10 - 50 Coil Number for Each Layer
Settings
1 to 10000
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 1
This parameter is used to set the needed coil number to rewind each layer. When integrating
thickness is selected as source of reel diameter, the reel diameter is calculated according to
this parameter.
10 - 51 Material Thickness
Settings
0.001 to 60.000 mm
Unit: 0.001
Factory Setting: 0.001
This parameter is used to set the material thickness. When integrating thickness is selected as
source of reel diameter, the reel diameter is calculated according to this parameter.
10 - 52
Filter Time of Reel Diameter Calculation
Settings
0.00 to 100.00 sec
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 1.00
This parameter is used to set the filter time constant of reel diameter, which can improve the
reel diameter’s unstability. Due to that too low setting is easy to cause system oscillation, it’s
better to set it as high as possible under the condition of correct reel diameter calculation.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-111
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
10 - 53 Reserved
10 - 54 ★ Current Reel Diameter
Settings
Unit: 1
1 to 10000 mm
Factory Setting: 1
When Pr.10-42 is set to 05, current reel diameter can be input to Pr.10-54 directly via RS-485
communication. Due to asynchronous motor slip, there is deviation between the calculated reel
diameter and the actual reel diameter.
10 - 55 Smart Start
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Disable (controlled by PID function only)
01
Enable
Smart start function: when starting, the tension is smaller and the dancer is unbalanced,
meanwhile, there is a larger deviation between tension feedback and tension target value, at
this time, if PID function is directly used to start, system overshooting may occur and further
cause line broken.
When smart start is enabled, after starting AC motor drive, the dancer is lifted to close to
balance and smart start won’t finish until tension feedback signal reaches Pr.10-56 setting.
10 - 56 Switch Level for Smart Start and PID function
Settings
Unit: 0.1
0 to 100% (according to Pr.10-26 PID Target
Value of Tension)
Factory Setting: 15.0
This parameter is used to set the switch level for smart start and PID function. Starting
level=(Pr.10-26)-(Pr.10-56)
10 - 57
Frequency for Smart Start
Settings
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 2.00
When Pr.10-55 is set to 01, this parameter is used to set the frequency for smart start.
10 - 58
Accel. Time for Smart Start
Settings
0.1 to 400.00Hz
0.1 to 3600.0 sec/0.01 to 3600.00 sec
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Factory Setting: 3.0
This parameter is used to set the acceleration time from 0.0Hz to Maximum Output Frequency
(Pr. 01-00) during smart start.
5-112
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
10 - 59 Broken Line Detection
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
Disable
01
Enable
Broken line is detected according to abnormal reel diameter. If the reel diameter becomes
smaller and smaller during rewinding or the reel diameter gets bigger and bigger during
unwinding, the line may have broken.
10 - 60 Min. Line Speed of Broken Line Detection
Settings
0.1 to 3000.0 m/min.
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 200.0
When the system runs at lower frequency, the line speed and the output frequency of AC
motor drive are lower, thus, smaller detection error will result in larger error of reel diameter
calculation, so it is needed to set the minimum line speed of broken line detection.
When the line speed is lower than Pr.10-60 setting, broken line won’t be detected.
10 - 61 Allowance Error of Reel Diameter of Broken Line Detection
Settings
1 to 10000 mm
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100
When the line speed is higher then Pr.10-60, allowance error of reel diameter exceeds Pr.1061 and detection time of broken line exceeds Pr.10-62, broken line protection will be activated.
10 - 62 Detection Time of Broken Line
Settings
0.1 to 1000.0 sec
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.5
10 - 63 Allowance Error Level of Tension PID Feedback
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 100.0
This parameter is used to set the allowance error level of tension PID feedback, which
corresponds to the percentage of maximum value set by Pr.10-27. When this parameter is set
to 100.0, it means no detection.
If ∣feedback value - target value∣>Pr.10-63 during the time defined by Pr.10-64, tension
PID feedback is considered as error, which will be treated as Pr.10-65 setting.
Note: If Pr.10-55 is set to 01, error detection of PID feedback is disabled before smart start is
finished.
10 - 64 Allowance Error Detection Time of Tension PID Feedback
Settings
0.1 to 1000.0 sec
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.5
5-113
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
This parameter defines the error detection time of tension PID feedback.
10 - 65 Error Treatment of Tension PID Feedback
Factory Setting: 02
Settings
00
Warn (rFbE) and keep operating
01
Warn (rFbE) and ramp to stop
02
Warn (rFbE) and coast to stop
This parameter is used to set the treatment when tension PID feedback error occurs.
10 - 66 Upper Limit of Tension PID Feedback
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
10 - 67 Lower Limit of Tension PID Feedback
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 100.0
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
These parameters are used to set the upper/lower limit of tension PID feedback. If the
feedback value exceeds the upper/lower limit, Pr.10-66/Pr.10-67 setting value will be input so
as to avoid overshooting.
10 - 68 Reserved
10 - 69 DFM Selection
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
10 - 70
00
Output frequency
01
Frequency command
02
Line speed
Filter Time of Line Speed
Settings
0.00 to 100.00 sec
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
10 - 71 Reserved
5-114
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Group 11: Fan and Pump Control Parameters
11 - 00 V/f Curve Selection
Factory Setting: 00
Settings
00
V/f curve determined by parameter group 01
01
1.5 power curve
02
1.7 power curve
03
Square curve
04
Cube curve
Confirm the load curve and select the proper V/f curve before use.
The available V/f curves are shown below:
01-0 2 Volta ge %
10 0
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
1.5 po w er c ur ve
1.7 po wer cur ve
Squa re po we r c ur ve
Cube p ow er cu rve
01 -0 1 Fr eq. %
20
40
60
80
10 0
11 - 01 Start-up Frequency of the Auxiliary Motor
Settings
0.00 to 400.00 Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
This parameter serves as a reference for the startup value of the auxiliary motor. If the setting
is 0.00, the auxiliary motor cannot be activated.
11 - 02 Stop Frequency of the Auxiliary Motor
Settings
0.00 to 400.00 Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
This parameter serves as a reference for the stop value of the auxiliary motor.
There must be a minimum of 5 Hz difference between the start frequency and stop frequency
of auxiliary motor. (Pr.11-01-Pr.11-02) > 5 Hz.
11 - 03 Time Delay before Starting the Auxiliary Motor
Settings
0.0 to 3600.0 sec
11 - 04 Time Delay before Stopping the Auxiliary Motor
Settings
0.0 to 3600.0 sec
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
5-115
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
The number of Multi-function Output terminals set to 16, 17, 18 decides the number of auxiliary
motors. The maximum is three.
The start/stop frequency of the auxiliary motor must have a minimum of 5Hz difference.
The start/stop delay time can prevent the AC motor drive from overload during
starting/stopping.
The stop sequence of auxiliary motors:
The auxiliary motor started first will be stopped first.
Example: Start sequence: motor 1 -> motor 2 -> motor 3
Stop sequence: motor 1 -> motor 2 -> motor 3
The flowchart of auxiliary motor start/stop sequence:
Pr.11-01 Start-up frequency = 50 Hz, Pr.11-02 Stop frequency = 20 Hz
Pr.11-03 Time delay before start up = 10 sec, Pr.11-04 Time delay before stopping = 5 sec
Output frequency of
master motor
50
H
Output Freq.
YES
Start delay timer
of auxiliary
motor begins
Counter
10 sec
YES
Start the
auxiliary motor
in order
11 - 05 Sleep/Wake Up Detection Time
Settings
0.0 to 6550.0 sec
11 - 06 Sleep Frequency
Settings
0.00 to Fmax Hz
11 - 07 Wakeup Frequency
Settings
5-116
H
20
Output Freq.
NO
YES
11-03
NO
NO
0.00 to Fmax Hz
11-04
Stop delay timer
of auxiliary
motor begins
Counter
5 sec
NO
YES
Stop the
auxiliary motor
in order
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
When the actual output frequency
≤
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
Pr.11-06 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr.11-05,
the AC motor drive will be in sleep mode.
When the actual frequency command > Pr.11-07 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr.11-05,
the AC motor drive will restart.
When the AC motor drive is in sleep mode, frequency command is still calculated by PID.
When frequency reaches wake up frequency, AC motor drive will accelerate from Pr.01-05 min.
frequency by V/f curve.
The wake up frequency must be higher than sleep frequency.
Frequency
frequency calculated by PID
11-07
The limit of
decel. time
output
frequency
11-06
01-08
The limit of
accel. time
01-05
Time
11-05
Fmin
Fcmd=0
Fmin<Fsleep<
lower bound
of frequency
Fsleep
lower bound
of frequency
Fout = 0
When output frequency ≦ sleep frequency and time > detection time, it will go into sleep mode.
When min. output frequency ≦ PID frequency ≦ lower bound of frequency and sleep function
is enabled (output frequency ≦ sleep frequency and time > detection time), frequency will be 0
(in sleep mode). If sleep function is disabled, frequency command = lower bound frequency.
When PID frequency < min. output frequency and sleep function is enabled (output frequency
≦ sleep frequency and time > detection time), output frequency =0 (in sleep mode).
If output frequency ≦ sleep frequency but time < detection time, frequency command = lower
frequency. If sleep function is disabled, output frequency =0.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
5-117
Chapter 5 Parameters|VFD-BW Series
This page intentionally left blank.
5-118
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information
The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different
alarms and fault messages. Once a fault is detected, the corresponding protective functions will be
activated. The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display.
The four most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication.
NOTE
Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad or input terminal.
6.1 Common Problems and Solutions
Fault
Name
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
1.
Over current
Abnormal increase in current.
2.
3.
4.
IGBT protection
(Insulated Gate Bipolar
Transistor)
5.
6.
7.
1.
Over voltage
The DC bus voltage has
exceeded its maximum
allowable value.
2.
3.
4.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Check if motor power corresponds with the AC
motor drive output power.
Check the wiring connections to U, V, W for
possible short circuits.
Check the wiring connections between the AC
motor drive and motor for possible short
circuits, also to ground.
Check for loose contacts between AC motor
drive and motor.
Increase the Acceleration Time.
Check for possible excessive loading
conditions at the motor.
If there are still any abnormal conditions when
operating the AC motor drive after a shortcircuit is removed and the other points above
are checked, it should be sent back to
manufacturer.
Check if the input voltage falls within the rated
AC motor drive input voltage range.
Check for possible voltage transients.
DC-bus over-voltage may also be caused by
motor regeneration. Either increase the Decel.
Time or add an optional brake resistor (and
brake unit).
Check whether the required brake power is
within the specified limits.
6-1
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information|VFD-BW Series
Fault
Name
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
1.
2.
Overheating
Heat sink temperature is too
high
3.
4.
5.
Low voltage
The AC motor drive detects
that the DC bus voltage has
fallen below its minimum
value.
Overload
The AC motor drive detects
excessive drive output current.
NOTE: The AC motor drive
can withstand up to 150% of
the rated current for a
maximum of 60 seconds.
Overload 1
Internal electronic overload trip
Overload 2
Motor overload.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Ensure that the ambient temperature falls
within the specified temperature range.
Make sure that the ventilation holes are not
obstructed.
Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks
and check for possible dirty heat sink fins.
Check the fan and clean it.
Provide enough spacing for adequate
ventilation. (See chapter 2)
Check whether the input voltage falls within
the AC motor drive rated input voltage range.
Check for abnormal load in motor.
Check for correct wiring of input power to R-ST (for 3-phase models) without phase loss.
Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Reduce torque compensation setting in Pr.0702.
Use the next higher power AC motor drive
model.
Check for possible motor overload.
Check electronic thermal overload setting.
Use a higher power motor.
Reduce the current level so that the drive
output current does not exceed the value set
by the Motor Rated Current Pr.07-00.
Reduce the motor load.
Adjust the over-torque detection setting to an
appropriate setting (Pr.06-03 to Pr.06-05).
GFF hardware error
CC (current clamp)
OC hardware error
Return to the factory.
OV hardware error
1.
External Base Block.
(Refer to Pr. 08-06)
2.
1.
2.
Over-current during
acceleration
3.
4.
5.
6-2
When the external input terminal (B.B) is
active, the AC motor drive output will be turned
off.
Deactivate the external input terminal (B.B) to
operate the AC motor drive again.
Check for loose contacts between AC motor
drive and motor.
Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output lines.
Torque boost too high: Decrease the torque
compensation setting in Pr.07-02.
Acceleration Time too short: Increase the
Acceleration Time.
AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information|VFD-BW Series
Fault
Name
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
1.
Over-current during
deceleration
Over-current during
constant speed operation
Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output line.
2. Deceleration Time too short: Increase the
Deceleration Time.
3. AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output line.
2. Sudden increase in motor loading: Check for
possible motor stall.
3. AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
1.
External Fault
2.
1.
Emergency stop
2.
Input EF (N.O.) on external terminal is closed
to GND. U, V, W output will be turned off.
Give RESET command after fault has been
cleared.
When the multi-function input terminals MI1 to
MI6 are set to emergency stop (setting 19 or
20), the AC motor drive stops U, V, W output
and the motor coasts to stop.
Press RESET after fault has been cleared.
Internal EEPROM can not be
programmed.
Return to the factory.
Internal EEPROM can not be
read.
Use RESET command to reset the drive to factory
setting, if it is still abnormal, it should be sent back
to the manufacturer.
U-phase error
V-phase error
W-phase error
OV or LV
Return to the factory.
Current sensor error
OH error
Ground fault
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded,
short circuit current is more than 50% of AC motor
drive rated current, the AC motor drive power
module may be damaged.
NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided
for AC motor drive protection, not for
protection of the user.
1. Check the wiring connections between the AC
motor drive and motor for possible short
circuits, also to ground.
2. Check whether the IGBT power module is
damaged.
3. Check for possible poor insulation at the
output line.
6-3
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information|VFD-BW Series
Fault
Name
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
1.
Auto accel/decel failure
Communication Error
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Software protection failure
Password is locked.
Analog feedback error or
ACI open circuit
PG feedback signal error
Phase Loss
EF when preliminary count
value attained
Auto Tuning Error
Low Current
Fan Power Fault
(125~250HP)
Fan 1 fault (125~250HP)
Fan 2 fault (125~250HP)
Fan 3 fault (125~250HP)
Fan 1, 2, 3 fault
(125~250HP)
Fan 1, 2 fault (125~250HP)
Fan 1, 3 fault (125~250HP)
Fan 2, 3 fault (125~250HP)
Gate Drive Low Voltage
Protect (125~250HP)
6-4
Check if the motor is suitable for operation by
AC motor drive.
Check if the regenerative energy is too large.
Load may have changed suddenly.
Check the RS485 connection between the AC
motor drive and RS485 master for loose wires
and wiring to correct pins.
Check if the communication protocol, address,
transmission speed, etc. are properly set.
Use the correct checksum calculation.
Please refer to parameter group 09 in the
chapter 5 for detail information.
Return to the factory.
Keypad will be locked. Turn the power ON after
power OFF to re-enter the correct password. See
Pr.00-07 and 00-08.
1. Check parameter setting (Pr.10-00) and
AVI/ACI wiring.
2. Check for possible fault between system
response time and the feedback signal
detection time (Pr.10-08).
1. Check parameter settings and signal type of
PG feedback (Pr.10-10 and Pr.10-11).
2. Check if the wiring of PG card is correct.
Check input phase wiring for loose contacts.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
Check counter trigger signal.
Check Pr.03-09, Pr.03-11setting.
Check cabling between drive and motor.
Check Pr.07-05.
Check Load current.
Check Pr.06-12 to Pr.06-13 setting.
Return to the factory.
Remove any foreign objects on the heatsinks
check for possible dirty heat sink fins.
Remove any foreign objects on the heatsinks
check for possible dirty heat sink fins.
Remove any foreign objects on the heatsinks
check for possible dirty heat sink fins.
Remove any foreign objects on the heatsinks
check for possible dirty heat sink fins.
Remove any foreign objects on the heatsinks
check for possible dirty heat sink fins.
Remove any foreign objects on the heatsinks
check for possible dirty heat sink fins.
Remove any foreign objects on the heatsinks
check for possible dirty heat sink fins.
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
Return to the factory.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information|VFD-BW Series
Fault
Name
Fault Descriptions
Overheating
Motor temperature is too high
Error PID feedback in
tension control mode
Broken line detection in
tension control mode
The AC motor drive is
locked.
Corrective Actions
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Check if the motor is overloaded.
Check if the motor is damaged.
Check if the PTC wiring is correct.
Check if the warning or fault level is set
proper.
Check if broken line occurs.
Observe if the system is unstable.
Check parameter settings (Pr.10-64, Pr.10-66,
and Pr.10-67).
Check if it is correctly used with smart start.
Check parameter settings (Pr.10-60~10-62).
Check if parameters involving to calculate reel
diameter are set proper.
Contact to the manufacturer.
6.2 Reset
There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault:
STOP
1.
Press RESET key on PU01.
2.
Set external terminal to “RESET” (set one of Pr.04-04~Pr.04-09 to 05) and then set to be ON.
3.
Send “RESET” command by communication.
NOTE
Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or
personal injury due to immediate operation.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
6-5
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information|VFD-BW Series
This page intentionally left blank.
6-6
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Over Current (OC)
ocd
ocA
Ov er-c urrent
during acceleration
Yes
Remove s hor t cir cuit
or ground fault
Reduc e the load or
incr eas e the power
of AC motor dr ive
Can torque
compensation
be r educ ed?
Ov er c urrent
Check if there i s any short circ uits and
grounding between the U, V, W and motor
No
No
OC
Ov er-c urrent
during dec eleration
Yes
Check if load i s too lar ge
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Is tor que
compensation
suitable?
Yes
R educ e torque
compensation
No
Check if
Check if
acceler ati on time No deceleration time
is too short by
is too short by
load iner ti a.
load iner ti a.
Yes
Maybe AC motor drive
has malfunc ti on or error
due to nois e. Please
contact DELTA.
Yes
No Has l oad changed
suddenly?
Yes
Yes
Yes C an deceleration
Can acc el er ation
time be made longer?
time be made longer?
No
No
R educ e load or inc rease
the power of AC motor
driv e
Increase accel/decel
time
Reduc e load or inc rease
the pow er of AC motor
driv e
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
C heck brake
method. Please
contact DELTA
7-1
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting |VFD-BW Series
7.2 Ground Fault
Is output circuit(cable or
motor) of AC motor drive
grounded?
GFF
Ground fault
No
Maybe AC motor drive has
malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please
contact DELTA.
Yes
Remove ground fault
7.3 Over Voltage (OV)
Over voltage
No
Reduce voltage to
be within spec.
Is voltage within
specification
Yes
Has over-voltage occurred without load
Maybe AC motor drive
has malfunction or
misoperation due to
noise. Please contact
DELTA.
Yes
No
When OV occurs, check if the
voltage of DC BUS is greater
than protection value
No
Yes
Yes
No Does OV occur when
sudden acceleration
stops
Can
Yes
deceleration time
be increased?
No
Yes
Can
Yes
acceleration time
be increased?
Increase setting time
No
Reduce moment
of inertia
No
Need to consider using
brake unit or
DC brake
Can moment of load inertia
be reduced?
No
Can brake unit or DC brake be used?
No
Yes
Need to check control method. Please contact DELTA.
7-2
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting |VFD-BW Series
7.4 Low Voltage (Lv)
Low voltage
Is input power correct? Or power cut, Yes
including momentary power loss
Restart after reset
No
Check if there is any malfunction Yes
component or disconnection in
power supply circuit
Change defective component
and check connection
No
Make necessary corrections,
such as change power supply
system for requirement
No
Check if voltage is
within specification
Yes
Check if there is heavy load
with high start current in the
same power system
Yes
Using the different power
supply for this drive and
heavy load system
No
No
Check if Lv occurs when
breaker and magnetic
contactor is ON
No
Yes
Check if voltage between +1/+2
and - is greater than
400VDC (for 460V models)
Is power transformer
capacity suitable?
Yes
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
Yes
Control circuit has malfunction or
misoperation due to noise. Please
contact DELTA.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
7-3
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting |VFD-BW Series
7.5 Over Heat (OH)
AC motor driv e overheats
Heat sink overheats
No
Check if temper atur e of heat si nk
O
is greater than 90 C
Temperature detection mal functions.
Please contac t DELTA.
Yes
Is load too large
Yes
Reduc e load
No
If cooling fan functions normally
No
Change cooling fan
Yes
Check if cooling fan is jammed
Yes
Remove obstruc tion
No
Check if sur roundi ng temper atur e
is withi n specific ation
Yes
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or
misoperation due to noise. Pleas e contact
DELTA.
No
Adjust surrounding temperature
to speci fic ati on
7.6 Overload
OL
OL1/ OL2
Check for correct settings at
Pr. 06-06 and 06-07
No
Modify setting
Yes
Is load too large?
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction
or misoperation due to noise.
Yes
Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive
7-4
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting |VFD-BW Series
7.7 Display of PU01 is Abnormal
Abnormal display or no display
Yes
Cycle power to AC motor drive
Fix connector and eliminate noise
No
No
Display normal?
Check if all connectors are connect
correctly and no noise is present
Yes
Yes
AC motor drive works normally
AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
7.8 Phase Loss (PHL)
Phase loss
Check wiring at R, S and T terminals
No
Correct wiring
Yes
Check if the screws of terminals are tightened
No
Tighten all screws
Yes
Check if the input voltage of R, S, T is unbalanced
Yes
No
Please check the wiring
and power system for
abnormal power
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
7-5
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting |VFD-BW Series
7.9 Motor cannot Run
Check PU01
for normal
display
Motor cannot run
Check if non-fuse
No
breaker and magnetic
contactor are ON
No
Yes
Yes
Yes Check if there is any
fault code displayed
Reset after clearing
fault and then RUN
Check if input
voltage is normal
No
It can run when
no faults occur
Input "RUN"
command
by keypad
If jumper or DC
No
reactor is connected
between +1 and +2/B1
No
No Check if input FWD No
or REV command
Press UP to
check if motor
can run
Yes
No
Set frequency or not
Change switch or relay
No
Check if the parameter
setting and wiring of
analog signal and
multi-step speed
are correct
No
Check if there is any
No
output voltage from
terminals U, V and W
No
Yes
Correct connection
if upper bound freq.
and setting freq. is
lower than the min.
output freq.
Motor has malfunction
Check if the wiring
of FWD-DCM
and REV-DCM
is correct?
No
No
Yes
Modify frequency
setting
Yes
Use jumper
or DC reactor
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Yes
If load is too large
Check if any faults
occur, such as
Lv, PHL or
disconnection
Yes
Press UP key to
set frequency
No
No
Yes
Yes
Press RUN key to
check if it can run
Set them to ON
Yes
Change defective
potentiometer and
relay
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
Yes
Yes
Check if the setting
Yes
of torque
compensation
is correct
No
Check if motor
connection
is correct
No
Connect correctly
Motor is locked due to large load, please reduce load.
For example, if there is a brake, check if it is released.
Increase the setting of
torque compensation
7-6
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting |VFD-BW Series
7.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed
Motor can run but
cannot change speed
Modify the setting
Check if the setting of the
max. frequency is too low
Yes
Yes
No
If the setting of
Pr.05-17toPr.05-31
Yes is too high
Check to see if frequency is
Yes
out of range (upper/lower)
boundaries
No
Yes
If finished with
executing
Pr.05-15
No
Yes
Is it in PLC mode
Press UP/DOWN key
Yes
to see if speed has
any change
No
No
Yes
If there is any change
of the signal that sets Yes
frequency (0-10V and
4-20mA)
If the setting of
Pr.05-00 to Pr.05-14
are the same
No
Modify the setting
Check if the wiring between
M1~M6 to DCM is correct
Yes
Check if frequency for
each step is different
No
No
No Check if the wiring of
external terminal is correct
Correct
wiring
No
Yes
Change defective
potentiometer
Yes
Change frequencysetting
No Check if accel./decel.
time is set very long
Yes
Please set suitable
accel./decel. time by
load inertia
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
7-7
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting |VFD-BW Series
7.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration
Check if acceleration Yes
time is too short
Motor stalls during
acceleration
Increase setting time
No
Yes
Check if the inertia
Yes
of the motor and load
is too high
No
Thicken or shorten the
wiring between the
motor and AC motor drive
Yes
Use special motor?
No
Reduce load or
increase the capacity
of AC motor drive
Check for low voltage
at input
No
Reduce load or
increase the capacity
of AC motor drive
Yes
Check if the load torque
is too high
No
Check if the torque
Yes
compensation is suitable
Maybe AC motor drive has
malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact
DELTA
No
Increase torque compensation
7.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected
Motor does not run
as expected
Check if Pr. 01-01 to Pr. 01-06
and torque compensation
settings are proper
No
Adjust Pr.01-01 to Pr.01-06
and lower torque compensation
Yes
Run in low speed continuously?
Yes
Please use specific motor
No
Is load too large?
No
Yes
Reduce load or increase the
capacity of AC motor drive
Check if output voltage of U, V, W Yes
is balanced
Motor has malfunction
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
7-8
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting |VFD-BW Series
7.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise
There are many noises surround the AC motor drives and invade it by radiation or power circuit. It
may cause the misoperation of control circuit and even damage the AC motor drive. Of course, that
is a solution to increase the noise tolerance of AC motor drive. But it is not the best one due to the
limit. Therefore, solve it from the outside as following will be the best.
1. Add surge suppressor on the relay or contact to suppress switching surge between ON/OFF.
2. Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial circuit and separate from the main AC
circuit wiring.
3. Comply with the wiring regulation for those shielded wire and use isolation amplifier for long
wire length.
4. The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulation and ground independently, i.e.
not to have common ground with electric welding machine and power equipment.
5. Connect a noise filter at the input terminal of the AC motor drive to prevent noise from power
circuit.
In a word, three-level solutions for electromagnetic noise are “no product”, “no spread” and “no
receive”.
7.14 Environmental Condition
Since the AC motor drive is an electronic device, you should comply with the environmental
condition stated in the Chapter 2.1. The following steps should also be followed.
1. To prevent vibration, anti-vibration spacer is the last choice. The vibration tolerance must be
within the specification. The vibration effect is equal to the mechanical stress and it cannot
occur frequently, continuously or repeatedly to prevent damaging to the AC motor drive.
2. Store in a clean and dry location free from corrosive fumes/dust to prevent corrosion and poor
contacts. It also may cause short by low insulation in a humid location. The solution is to use
both paint and dust-proof. For particular occasion, use the enclosure with whole-seal structure.
3. The surrounding temperature should be within the specification. Too high or low temperature
will affect the lifetime and reliability. For semiconductor components, damage will occur once
any specification is out of range. Therefore, it is necessary to clean and periodical check for the
air cleaner and cooling fan besides having cooler and sunshade. In addition, the microcomputer
may not work in extreme low temperature and needs to have heater.
4. Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment. Do not
turn off the air conditioner and have exsiccator for it.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
7-9
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting |VFD-BW Series
7.15 Affecting Other Machines
AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machine due to many reasons. The solutions are
as follows.
„
High Harmonic at Power Side
If there is high harmonic at power side during running, the improved methods are:
1.
2.
Separate power system: use transformer for AC motor drive.
Use reactor at the power input terminal of AC motor drive or decrease high harmonic by
multiple circuit.
3.
If phase lead capacitors are used (never on the AC motor drive output!!), use serial
reactors to prevent capacitors damage from high harmonics.
serial reactor
phase lead capacitor
„
Motor Temperature Rises
When the motor is induction motor with ventilation-cooling-type used in variety speed operation,
bad cooling will happen in the low speed. Therefore, it may overheat. Besides, high harmonic is in
output waveform to increase copper loss and iron loss. Following measures should be used by
load situation and operation range when necessary.
7-10
1.
Use the motor with independent power ventilation or increase the horsepower.
2.
Use inverter duty motor.
3.
Do NOT run at low speeds for long time.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspections
Modern AC motor drives are based on solid state electronics technology. Preventive maintenance is
required to operate this AC motor drive in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life. It is
recommended to have a check-up of the AC motor drive performed by a qualified technician.
Daily Inspection:
Basic check-up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are:
1.
Whether the motors are operating as expected.
2.
Whether the installation environment is abnormal.
3.
Whether the cooling system is operating as expected.
4.
Whether any irregular vibration or sound occurred during operation.
5.
Whether the motors are overheating during operation.
6.
Always check the input voltage of the AC drive with a Voltmeter.
Periodic Inspection:
Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10
minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully
discharged by measuring the voltage between +1/+2 and -. The voltage between +1/+2 and - should
be less than 25VDC.
DANGER!
1.
2.
Disconnect AC power before processing!
Only qualified personnel can install, wire and maintain AC motor drives. Please take off any
metal objects, such as watches and rings, before operation. And only insulated tools are
allowed.
3.
Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
4.
Prevent electric shocks.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
8-1
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspections|VFD-BW Series
Periodical Maintenance
„ Ambient environment
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Maintenance
Period
Daily
Check the ambient temperature,
humidity, vibration and see if
there is any dust, gas, oil or water
drops
Visual inspection and measurement
with equipment with standard
specification
{
Check for any dangerous objects
near drive and motor
Visual inspection
{
Half One
Year Year
„ Voltage
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Daily
Check if the voltage of main
circuit and control circuit is
correct
Measure with multimeter with standard
specification
Half One
Year Year
{
„ Keypad
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Maintenance
Period
Daily
Is the display clear for reading
Visual inspection
{
Any missing characters
Visual inspection
{
Half One
Year Year
„ Mechanical parts
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Maintenance
Period
Daily
8-2
Half One
Year Year
If there is any abnormal sound or
vibration
Visual and aural inspection
{
If there are any loose screws
Tighten the screws
{
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspections|VFD-BW Series
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Maintenance
Period
Daily
Half One
Year Year
Check parts for deformity or
damaged
Visual inspection
{
If there is any color change
caused by overheating
Visual inspection
{
Check for dust and dirt
Visual inspection
{
„ Main circuit
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Maintenance
Period
Daily
Half One
Year Year
If there are any loose or missing
screws
Tighten or replace the screw
{
If machine or insulator is
deformed, cracked, damaged or
with color change due to
overheating or ageing
Visual inspection
NOTE: Please ignore the color
change of copper plate
{
Check for dust and dirt
Visual inspection
{
„ Terminals and wiring of main circuit
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Maintenance
Period
Daily
Half One
Year Year
If the wiring is color change or
deformation due to overheat
Visual inspection
{
If the insulator of wiring is
damaged or color change
Visual inspection
{
If terminals are damaged
Visual inspection
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
{
8-3
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspections|VFD-BW Series
„ DC capacity of main circuit
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Maintenance
Period
Daily
If there is any leak of liquid, color
change, crack or deformation
Visual inspection
Measure static capacity when
required
Static capacity
Half One
Year Year
{
≥ initial value X 0.85
{
„ Resistor of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Daily
If there is any peculiar smell or
insulator cracks due to overheat
Visual inspection, smell
{
If there is any disconnection
Visual inspection or measure with
multimeter after removing wiring
between +1/+2 ~ Resistor value should be within ± 10%
{
Half One
Year Year
„ Transformer and reactor of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Daily
If there is any abnormal vibration
or peculiar smell
Visual, aural inspection and smell
Half One
Year Year
{
„ Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Daily
8-4
If there are any loose screws
Visual and aural inspection
{
Check to see if contacts work
correctly
Visual inspection
{
Half One
Year Year
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspections|VFD-BW Series
„ Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half One
Year Year
If there are any loose screws and
connectors
Tighten the screws and press the
connectors firmly in place.
{
If there is any peculiar smell and
color change
Visual inspection and smell
{
If there is any crack, damage,
deformation or corrosion
Visual inspection
{
If there is any liquid is leaked or
deformation in capacity
Visual inspection
{
„ Cooling fan of cooling system
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Daily
Half One
Year Year
If there is any abnormal sound or
vibration
Visual, aural inspection and turn the
fan with hand (turn off the power
before operation) to see if it rotates
smoothly
{
If there is any loose screw
Tighten the screw
{
If there is any color change due to
overheat
Change fan
{
„ Ventilation channel of cooling system
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Daily
If there is any obstruction in the
heat sink, air intake or air outlet
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Visual inspection
Half One
Year Year
{
8-5
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspections|VFD-BW Series
This page intentionally left blank.
8-6
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix A Specifications
Voltage Class
Model Number
VFD_ _ _B43W
460V Class
900 1100 1320 1600 1850
Max. Applicable
Motor Output (kW)
0.75 1.5 2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
185
Max. Applicable
Motor Output (HP)
1.0
2.0 3.0
5.0
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
175
215
250
Rated Output
Capacity (KVA)
2.3
3.2 4.2
6.5
9.9 13.7 18.3 24.4 28.9 34.3 45.7 55.6 69.3 84
114
137
168
198
236
281
Rated Output
Current (A)
2.7
4.2 5.5
8.5
13
110 150
180
220
260
310
370
Output Rating
007 015 022 037 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 750
24
32
38
45
60
73
91
Maximum Output
Voltage (V)
3-phase Proportional to Input Voltage
Output
Frequency (Hz)
0.1~400Hz
Carrier
Frequency (kHz)
Rated Input
Current (A)
Input Rating
18
1-15
1-9
3-phase
3.2 4.3 5.9 11.2
14
19
25
32
39
49
60
63
Rated Voltage
3-phase 380~480V
Voltage
Tolerance
±10% (342~528V)
Frequency
Tolerance
± 5% (47~63Hz)
Cooling Method
Weight (kg)
1-6
Natural
2.7 3.2 4.5
90
130 160
180
200
240
300
380
113
119
119
150
150
Fan Cooled
6.8
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
8
10
13
13
13
13
36
36
36
50
50
A-1
Control Characteristics
Appendix A Specifications|VFD-BW Series
General Specifications
SPWM (Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation) control (V/f or sensorless vector
control)
Control System
Output Frequency Resolution
0.01Hz
Torque Characteristics
Including the auto-torque, auto-slip compensation; starting torque can be 150%
at 1.0Hz
Overload Endurance
150% of rated current for 1 minute
Accel/Decel Time
0.1 to 3600 seconds (4 Independent settings for Accel/Decel time)
V/f Pattern
Adjustable V/f pattern, 1.5 power curve, 1.7 power curve, square and cube curve
Operating Characteristics
Stall Prevention Level
Keypad
Frequency
Setting
External Signal
Operation
Setting
Signal
External Signal
Keypad
Enviromental Conditions
Potentiometer 5kΩ/0.5W, 0 to +10VDC; -10 to +10VDC, 4 to 20mA RS-485
interface; Multi-Function Inputs 1 to 6 (15 steps, Jog, up/down)
Set by RUN, STOP and JOG
2 wires/3 wires (Fwd, Rev, EF), JOG operation, RS-485 serial interface
(MODBUS), process logic control
Multi-Function Input Signal
Multi-step selection 0 to 15, Jog, accel/decel inhibit, first to forth accel/decel
switches, counter, PLC operation, external Base Block (NC, NO), auxiliary motor
control is invalid, ACI/AVI/AUI selections, driver reset, UP/DOWN key settings,
sink/source selection and reel diameter initialization
Multi-Function Output
Indication
Driver is ready, overheat alarm, emergency stop and signal loss alarm
Analog Output Signal
A-2
20 to 250%, setting of rated current
Setting by
Output frequency/current/voltage/frequency command/speed/factor
Alarm Output Contact
Contact will be On when it malfunctions (1 Form C contact or 3 open collector
outputs)
Operation Functions
AVR, accel/decel S-Curve, over-voltage/over-current stall prevention, fault
records, reverse inhibition, momentary power loss restart, DC brake, auto
torque/slip compensation, auto tuning, adjustable carrier frequency, output
frequency limits, parameter lock/reset, vector control, counter, PG feedback
control, PID control, fan & pump control, external counter, PLC, MODBUS
communication, abnormal reset, abnormal re-start, power-saving, sleep/revival
function, digital frequency output, fan control, sleep/wake frequency,
master/auxiliary frequency, 1st/2nd frequency source selections, indirect tension
control, rewind/unwind control
Protection Functions
Over voltage, over current, low voltage, low current, external fault, overload,
ground fault, overheating, electronic thermal, IGBT short circuit
Installation Location
Altitude 1,000 m or lower, keep from corrosive gasses, liquid and dust
Ambient Temperature
-10oC to 40oC Non-Condensing and not frozen
Storage Temperature
-20 oC to 60 oC
Ambient Humidity
Below 90% RH (non-condensing)
Vibration
9.80665m/s2 (1G) less than 20Hz, 5.88m/s2 (0.6G) at 20 to 50Hz
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories
B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives
Note: Please only use DELTA resistors and recommended values. Other resistors and values will
void Delta’s warranty. Please contact your nearest Delta representative for use of special resistors.
For instance, in 460V series, 100hp/75kW, the AC motor drive needs 2 brake units with total of 16
brake resistors, so each brake unit uses 8 brake resistors. The brake unit should be at least 10 cm
away from AC motor drive to avoid possible interference. Refer to the “Brake Unit Module User
460V Series
Voltage
Manual” for further details.
Applicable
Motor
Full
Brake Unit
Resistor value
Load
(VFDB)
Torque spec for each AC Part No. and
Motor Drive
Nm
Quantity
Brake Resistors
Part No. and
Quantity
Min.
Brake Equivalent
Resistor
Torque
Value for
10%ED
each AC
Motor Drive
HP
kW
1
0.75
0.427
80W 750Ω
BR080W750
1
125
160Ω
2
1.5
0.849
300W 400Ω
BR300W400
1
125
160Ω
3
2.2
1.262
300W 250Ω
BR300W250
1
125
160Ω
5
3.7
2.080
400W 150Ω
BR400W150
1
125
130Ω
7.5
5.5
3.111
500W 100Ω
BR500W100
1
125
91Ω
10
7.5
4.148
1000W 75Ω
BR1K0W075
1
125
62Ω
15
11
6.186
1000W 50Ω
BR1K0W050
1
125
39Ω
20
15
8.248
1500W 40Ω
4030
1
BR1K5W040
1
125
40Ω
25
18.5
10.281
4800W 32Ω
4030
1
BR1K2W008
4
125
32Ω
30
22
12.338
4800W 27.2Ω
4030
1
BR1K2W6P8
4
125
27.2Ω
40
30
16.497
6000W 20Ω
4030
1
BR1K5W005
4
125
20Ω
50
37
20.6
9600W 16Ω
4045
1
BR1K2W008
8
125
16Ω
60
45
24.745
9600W 13.6Ω
4045
1
BR1K2W6P8
8
125
13.6Ω
75
55
31.11
12000W 10Ω
4030
2
BR1K5W005
8
125
10Ω
100
75
42.7
19200W 6.8Ω
4045
2
BR1K2W6P8
16
125
6.8Ω
120
90
52.5
13500W 5Ω
4132
1
BR1K5W005
9
120
5Ω
150
110
61
21600W 4Ω
4132
1
BR1K2W008
18
120
4Ω
175
132
73.5
21600W 4Ω
4132
1
BR1K2W008
18
100
4Ω
215
160
89
21600W 3.4Ω
4132
1
BR1K2W6P8
18
97
3.4Ω
250
185
103
27000W 2.5Ω
4132
2
BR1K5W005
18
115
2.5Ω
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
B-1
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
NOTE
1.
2.
Please select the factory setting resistance value (Watt) and the duty-cycle value (ED%).
If damage to the drive or other equipment are due to the fact that the brake resistors and the
brake modules in use are not provided by Delta, the warranty will be void.
3.
4.
Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors.
If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of the
Watt figures.
5.
Please select thermal relay trip contact to prevent resistor over load. Use the contact to switch
power off to the AC motor drive!
6.
When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can’t be
less than the value in the column “Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive” (the
right-most column in the table).
7.
Please read the wiring information in the user manual of brake unit thoroughly prior to taking
into operation.
8.
In applications with brake resistor or brake unit, Pr.06-00 (Over-voltage stall prevention) must
be disabled. And Pr.08-16 (AVR function) shall not be used.
9.
Definition for Brake Usage ED%
Explanation: The definition of the barking usage ED(%) is for assurance of enough time for the
brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate away heat generated by braking. When the brake
resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with temperature, and brake torque would
decrease accordingly. Suggest cycle time is one minute
100%
Brake Time
T1
Cycle Time
10.
ED% = T1/T0x100(%)
T0
For safety reasons, install a thermal overload relay between brake unit and brake resistor.
Together with the magnetic contactor (MC) in the mains supply circuit to the drive it offers
protection in case of any malfunctioning. The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is
to protect the brake resistor against damage due to frequent brake or in case the brake unit is
continuously on due to unusual high input voltage. Under these circumstances the thermal
overload relay switches off the power to the drive. Never let the thermal overload relay switch
off only the brake resistor as this will cause serious damage to the AC Motor Drive.
B-2
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
NFB
MC
R/L1
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
S/L2
V/T2
IM
T/L3
T/L3
W/T3
MOTOR
VFD Series
O.L.
Thermal
Overload
Relay or
temperature
switch
MC
SA
Surge
Absorber
B1
+(P )
+(P )
- (N )
- ( N ) Brake
E.F
RA
DCM
RC
Thermal Overload
Relay
O.L.
Brake
Unit
(VFDB)
BR Resistor
B2
Temperature
Switch
Note1: When using the AC drive with DC reactor, please refer to wiring diagram in the AC drive
user manual for the wiring of terminal +(P) of Brake unit.
Note2: Do NOT wire terminal -(N) to the neutral point of power system.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
B-3
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors
(Dimensions are in millimeter)
B-4
TYPE
BR080W200
BR080W750
BR300W070
BR300W100
BR300W250
BR300W400
BR400W150
BR400W040
L1
140
140
215
215
215
215
265
265
L2
125
125
200
200
200
200
250
250
H
20
20
30
30
30
30
30
30
D
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.3
W
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
MAX. WEIGHT(g)
160
160
750
750
750
750
930
930
TYPE
BR500W030
BR500W100
BR1K0W020
BR1K0W075
L1
335
335
400
400
L2
320
320
385
385
H
30
30
50
50
D
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.3
W
60
60
100
100
MAX. WEIGHT(g)
1100
1100
2800
2800
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
Order P/N: BR1K0W050, BR1K2W008, BR1K2W6P8, BR1K5W005, BR1K5W040
B.1.2 Specifications for Brake Unit
Voltage Class
Model Number VFDB-□□□□
Protection
Input
Output Rating
Rating
Max. Motor Power (kW)
Max. Peak Discharge
Current (A) 10%ED
Continuous Discharge
Current (A)
Brake Start-up Voltage
(DC)
DC Voltage
Heat Sink Overheat
Alarm Output
Power Charge Display
Environment
Installation Location
230V Series (for VFD-B )
2022
4030
4045
4132
15
22
30
45
132
40
60
40
60
240
15
20
15
18
75
330/345/360/380/
400/415±3V
200~400VDC
Blackout until bus (+~-) voltage is below 50VDC
-20°C∼+60°C
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
480~750VDC
Indoor (no corrosive gases, metallic dust))
-10°C∼+50°C
Wall-mounted Enclosed Type
400~800VDC
Temperature over +95°C
Storage Temperature
Vibration
660/690/720/760/
618/642/667/
800/830±6V
690/725/750±6V
RELAY contact 5A120Vac/28Vdc(RA.RB.RC)
Operating Temperature
Humidity
460V Series
2015
Below 90% RH Non-condensing
9.8m/S2 (1G) under 20Hz
2m/S2 (0.2G) at 20∼50Hz
IP50
IP10
B-5
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.1.3 Dimensions for Brake Unit
(Dimensions are in millimeter[inch])
Order P/N: VFDB2015, VFDB2022, VFDB4030, VFDB4045
121.0 [4.76]
80.0 [3.15]
R3.3 [R0.13]
130.0 [5.12]
189.5 [7.46]
200.0 [7.87]
LABEL 1
WARNING:
LABEL 2
B e sure to read the instruction manunal before
wiring.
Do not inspect components unless inside "CHARGE"
lamp is off.
Use proper grounding techniques.
B-6
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
Order P/N: VFDB4132
CHARGE ACT
OC
OH
VFDB4132
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
B-7
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.2 AMD - EMI Filter Cross Reference
AC Drives
Filter Model Number
FootPrint
VFD007B43W, VFD015B43W, VFD022B43W
RF022B43AA
Y
VFD037B43W
VFD055B43W,VFD075B43W, VFD110B43W
RF037B43BA
RF110B43CA
Y
Y
VFD150B43W, VFD185B43W
50TDS4W4C
N
VFD220B43W, VFD300B43W, VFD370B43W
100TDS84C
N
VFD450B43W
150TDS84C
N
Installation
All electrical equipment, including AC motor drives, will generate high-frequency/low-frequency
noise and will interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation. By
using an EMI filter with correct installation, much of the interference can be eliminated. It is
recommended to use DELTA EMI filter to have the best interference elimination performance.
We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC motor drive and EMI filter are installed
and wired according to user manual:
„
EN61000-6-4
„
EN61800-3: 1996 + A11: 2000
„
EN55011 (1991) Class A Group 1 (1st Environment, restricted distribution)
General precaution
1. EMI filter and AC motor drive should be installed on the same metal plate.
2. Please install AC motor drive on same footprint with EMI filter or install EMI filter as close as
possible to the AC motor drive.
3. All wiring should be as short as possible.
4. Metal plate should be grounded.
5. The cover of EMI filter and AC motor drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate and
the contact area should be as large as possible.
Choose suitable motor cable and precautions
Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMI filter. Be sure to
observe the following precautions when selecting motor cable.
B-8
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
1.
2.
Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best).
The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum length
and maximum contact area.
3.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with
the plate and shielding.
saddle
the plate with grounding
Saddle on both ends
Saddle on one end
The length of motor cable
When motor is driven by an AC motor drive of PWM type, the motor terminals will experience surge
voltages easily due to components conversion of AC motor drive and cable capacitance. When the
motor cable is very long (especially for the 460V series), surge voltages may reduce insulation
quality. To prevent this situation, please follow the rules below:
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
B-9
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
„ Use a motor with enhanced insulation.
„ Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive
„ The length of the cable between AC motor drive and motor should be as short as possible
(10 to 20 m or less)
„ For models 7.5hp/5.5kW and above:
Insulation level of motor
460VAC input voltage
1000V
66 ft (20m)
1300V
328 ft (100m)
1600V
1312 ft (400m)
„ For models 5hp/3.7kW and less:
Insulation level of motor
1000V
1300V
1600V
460VAC input voltage
66 ft (20m)
165 ft (50m)
165 ft (50m)
NOTE
„
When a thermal O/L relay protected by motor is used between AC motor drive and motor, it may
malfunction (especially for 460V series), even if the length of motor cable is only 165 ft (50m) or
less. To prevent it, please use AC reactor and/or lower the carrier frequency (Pr. 02-03 PWM
carrier frequency).
„
Never connect phase lead capacitors or surge absorbers to the output terminals of the AC motor
drive.
„
If the length is too long, the stray capacitance between cables will increase and may cause
leakage current. It will activate the protection of over current, increase leakage current or not
insure the correction of current display. The worst case is that AC motor drive may be damaged.
„
If more than one motor is connected to the AC motor drive, the total wiring length is the sum of
the wiring length from AC motor drive to each motor.
B-10
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.2.1 Dimensions
Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch)
Order P/N: RF022B43AA
118
50
(1.97)
28
(1.1)
90
(3.54)
226
(8.9)
16
(0.63)
24
(0.94)
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
226 239
(8.9) (9.4)
5.5
(3.37)
B-11
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
Order P/N: RF037B43BA
60
150
30
110
302
15
B-12
30
302
315
5.5
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
Order P/N: RF110B43CA
60
200
33
120
382
20
26
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
382
398
7.0
B-13
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
Order P/N: 50TDS4W4C
Order P/N: 100TDS84C
B-14
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
Order P/N: 150TDS84C
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
B-15
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.3 PG Card (for Encoder)
B.3.1 PG02
B.3.1.1 Installation
1~3HP (0.75kW~2.2kW)
u
Ins
lat
ion
a
sp
ce
r
PG
PG
Ca
rd
Te
r
mi
-0
na
2
tic f
as of
Pl and
t
S
l
Co
nt r
b
ol
oa
rd
5HP (3.7kW)
PG
-02
Insu latio n
spac er
PG
Ca
rd
Te
rm
i na
l
C
B-16
rol
ont
boa
rd
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
7.5HP (5.5kW) and above
P G-
02
Insul ation
spac er
P la
St a s t ic
nd
off
PG
Car
d Te
r m in
al
B.3.1.2 PG Card and Pulse Generator (Encoder)
1. Basic Wiring Diagram
None fused breaker
R/L1
NFB
R/L1
U/T1
Motor
S/L2
S/L2
V/T2
IM
3~
T/L3
T/L3
W/T3
OC 12V
Factory
Setting
A
A
A
B
B
PG-02
VP
DCM
A
B
PG
B
+12V
GND
TP 5V
Pulse Generator
Output 12V DC
Main circuit (power) terminals
Control circuit terminals
PG-02 and Pulse Generator Connections
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
B-17
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
2. Basic Wiring Diagram with RPM Meter Attached.
None fused breaker
R/L1
NFB
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
T/L3
W/T3
IM
3~
VFD-B
A
A
A
B
B
OC 12V
VP
TP 5V
DCM
A
B
PG
B
+5V
GND
A/O
B/O
COM
Main circuit (power) terminals
RPM meter
Control circuit terminals
PG-02 and Pulse Generator Connections
B.3.1.3 PG-02 Terminal Descriptions
1. Terminals
Terminal Symbols
VP
DCM
A- A , B- B
Descriptions
Power source of PG-02 (FSW1 can be switched to 12V or 5V)
Output Voltage: (+12VDC ±5% 200mA) or (+5VDC ±2% 400mA)
Power source (VP) and input signal (A, B) common
Input signal from Pulse Generator. Input type is selected by FSW2.
It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input. Maximum 500kP/sec (z-phase
function is reserved). If the voltage exceeds 12V, it needs to use TP
type with connecting the external current limiting resistor(R). The
current should be within 5 to 15mA.
The formal of current limiting resistor is:
5mA ≤
B-18
Vin − 2V
≤ 15mA
480Ω + R
A/O, B/O
PG-02 output signal for use with RPM Meter. (Open Collector)
Maximum DC24V 100mA
COM
PG-02 output signal (A/O, B/O) common.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
2. Wiring Notes
The control, power supply and motor leads must be laid separately. They must not be fed
through the same cable conduit / trunk.
a. Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to
any high voltage AC power line (220 V and above).
b. Connect shielded wire to terminal DCM only.
c. Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm2 (AWG24 to AWG18).
d. Wire length:
Types of Pulse Generators
Maximum Wire Length
Output Voltage
50m
Open Collector
50m
Line Driver
300m
Complementary
70m
Wire Gauge
1.25mm2 (AWG16) or above
3. Control Terminals Block Designations
Connect to VFD-B
series control board
Wiring Terminals
PG-02
FSW2 FSW1
Select the power
source and output
of Pulse Generator
OC 12V
TP 5V
A/O
B/O
COM
VP
DCM
A
A
B
B
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
B-19
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
4. Types of Pulse Generators (Encoders)
Types of Pulse Generators
FSW1 and FSW2 Switches
5V
12V
FSW2 FSW1
FSW2 FSW1
Output Voltage
VCC
OC 12V
OC 12V
O/P
TP 5V
TP 5V
FSW2 FSW1
FSW2 FSW1
TP 5V
TP 5V
Q
FSW2 FSW1
FSW2 FSW1
Q
TP 5V
TP 5V
FSW2 FSW1
FSW2 FSW1
TP 5V
TP 5V
0V
Open Collector
VCC
OC 12V
OC 12V
O/P
Line Driver
0V
OC 12V
OC 12V
Complimentary
VCC
OC 12V
OC 12V
O/P
0V
B-20
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.3.2 PG03
B.3.2.1 Installation
1~3HP (0.75kW~2.2kW)
-0
PG
in sul ati on
spa cer
PG
ca
rd
t er
mi
n
3
al
pl
t ic
as
st
d
an
Co
of
f
ro
nt
lb
rd
oa
5HP (3.7kW)
-0 3
PG
insulat ion
spacer
PG
ca
rd
te r
m
in a
l
st ic
p la
Co n
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
nd
s ta
tr o l
off
boa
rd
B-21
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
7.5HP (5.5kW) and above
P G-
03
insulat ion
spacer
p la s
t ic s
PG
ca r
d te
ta n d
rmi
of f
na
l
co n
t ro l
r
bo a
d
B.3.2.2 PG Card and Pulse Generator (Encoder)
1. Basic wiring diagram
R/L1
NFB
R/L1
U/T1
Motor
S/L2
S/L2
V/T2
M
3~
T/L3
T/L3
W/T3
VFD-B
A
A
PG-03
OC
A
A
B
B
B
12V
0V
PG
B
+12V
GND
Shield
TP Terminal
*Specification of the Encoder
is of the 12V/OC Output
Main circuit (power) terminals
Control circuit terminals
Connection between PG-03 and the Encoder
B-22
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
2. Connect Externally with the Encoder of 5V Power Supply and Output Signals to
Additional Tachometer
VFD-B
Non-Fuse B reaker
NFB
R/L1
R/L1
S/L2
S/L2
T/L3
T/L3
U/T1
M
3~
V/T2
W/T3
PG-03
OC
*Specification of the
Encoder is of 5V/OC output,
which could also connect
externally with the RPM wire.
TP
*Power of the RPM meter
should be supplied by the
customers.
A
A
B
B
A
A
B
B
PG
5V
12V
0V
GND
A/O
B/O
0V
DC Power
5V
0V
RPM Meter
Shield
Terminal
Main circuit (power) terminals
Control circuit terminals
Connection between PG-03 and the Encoder
B.3.2.3 PG-03 Terminal Descriptions
1. Terminals
Terminal Symbols
+12V
0V
A- A , B- B
Descriptions
Power Supply of the Encoder: +12V
Output Voltage: +12V±5% 200mA
Common point for the power supply and the signal
Input signal from Pulse Generator. Input type is selected by FSW2.
It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input. Maximum 500kP/sec (z-phase
function is reserved). If the voltage exceeds 12V, it needs to use TP
type with connecting the external current limiting resistor(R). The
current should be within 5 to 15mA.
The formal of current limiting resistor is:
5mA ≤
A/O, B/O
Vin − 2V
≤ 15mA
600Ω + R
The Encoder signal output
Maximum: DC24V 300mA
Common point for signal grounding
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
B-23
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
2. Wiring Notes
a)
Please use a shield cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wire parallel to
any high voltage AC power line (220V and up).
E only.
b)
Connect shielded wire to
c)
Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm2 (AWG24 to AWG18).
d)
Wire length:
Output Types of the Encoder Maximum Wire Length
Output Voltage
Wire Gauge
50m
Open Collector
50m
Line Driver
300m
Complementary
70m
1.25mm2 (AWG16) or above
3. Control Terminals Block Designations
Connect to the VFD
Series Control Board
PG-03
G
B
A
B-24
FSW2
OC
Select the input
power and the
output type of the
Encoder
TP
B/O
A/O
0V
12V
0V
B
B
A
A
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
4. Encoder types
Output Voltage
Output Types of the Encoder
VCC
OC
O/P
VCC
TP
OC
O/P
0V
Q
Line Driver
Open Collector
0V
Complimentary
FSW2 Switch
Q
VCC
TP
OC
TP
OC
O/P
TP
0V
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
B-25
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.4 Remote Controller RC-01
Dimensions are in millimeter
RC-01
Terminal
block
(Wiring
connections)
VFD-B
I/O
AFM ACM AVI +10V DCM MI5 FWD REV JOG
Block
8
6
5
4 16 15 14 13 11
VFD-B Programming:
Pr.02-00 set to 01
Pr.02-01 set to 01 (external controls)
Pr.02-05 set to 01 (setting Run/Stop and Fwd/Rev controls)
Pr.04-08 (MI5) set to 05 (External reset)
NOTE: It needs to set the switch SW1 to SINK mode.
B-26
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.5 Remote Panel Adapter (RPA 01)
Remote panel adapter for VFDPU01
Mounting hole dimensions (Dimensions are in millimeter)
Following is the mounting hole dimension of the plate for RPA01. Please choose the applicable one
from below, depending on the plate thickness (t).
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
B-27
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.6 AC Reactor
B.6.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
kW
HP
Fundamental Amps
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
185
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
175
215
250
4
4
8
8
12
18
25
35
35
45
55
80
80
100
130
160
200
250
320
400
Inductance (mH)
Max. continuous
Amps
3% impedance 5% impedance
6
9
12
6
6.5
9
12
5
7.5
12
3
5
18
2.5
4.2
27
1.5
2.5
37.5
1.2
2
52.5
0.8
1.2
52.5
0.8
1.2
67.5
0.7
1.2
82.5
0.5
0.85
120
0.4
0.7
120
0.4
0.7
150
0.3
0.45
195
0.2
0.3
240
0.15
0.23
300
0.11
0.185
375
0.09
0.15
480
0.075
0.125
560
0.06
0.105
B.6.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
B-28
kW
HP
Fundamental Amps
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
4
4
8
12
18
18
25
35
45
45
80
80
100
130
160
Max. continuous
Inductance (mH)
Amps
3% impedance 5% impedance
6
9
12
6
6.5
9
12
5
7.5
18
2.5
4.2
27
1.5
2.5
27
1.5
2.5
37.5
1.2
2
52.5
0.8
1.2
67.5
0.7
1.2
67.5
0.7
1.2
120
0.4
0.7
120
0.4
0.7
150
0.3
0.45
195
0.2
0.3
240
0.15
0.23
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.6.3 Applications for AC Reactor
Connected in input circuit
Application 1
When more than one AC motor drive is
connected to the same power, one of them is
ON during operation.
Question
When applying to one of the AC motor drive,
the charge current of capacity may cause
voltage ripple. The AC motor drive may
damage when over current occurs during
operation.
Correct wiring
M1
reactor
AC motor drive
motor
AC motor drive
motor
AC motor drive
motor
M2
Mn
Application 2
Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive is
connected to the same power.
Question
Surges will be generated at the instant of
silicon rectifier switching on/off. These surges
may damage the mains circuit.
Correct wiring
silicon rectifier
power
reactor
DC
AC motor drive
reactor
motor
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
B-29
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
Application 3
Used to improve the input power factor, to
reduce harmonics and provide protection from
AC line disturbances (surges, switching spikes,
short interruptions, etc.). AC line reactor should
be installed when the power supply capacity is
500kVA or more and exceeds 6 times the
inverter capacity, or the mains wiring distance
≤ 10m.
Question
When power capacity is too large, line
impedance will be small and the charge
current will be too large. That may damage
AC motor drive due to higher rectifier
temperature.
Correct wiring
large-capacity
power
reactor
small-capacity
AC motor drive
motor
B-30
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.7 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A)
Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch)
Cable
type
(Note)
Single
-core
Threecore
Recommended Wire
Size
AWG
mm2
Nominal
(mm2)
Wiring
Qty.
Method
Diagram B
Please put all wires through 4 cores in
series without winding.
Zero Phase Reactor
≦10
≦5.3
≦5.5
1
Diagram
A
≦2
≦33.6
≦38
4
Diagram
B
≦12
≦3.3
≦3.5
1
Diagram
A
≦1
≦42.4
≦50
4
Diagram
B
Power
Supply
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
MOTOR
Note 1: The table above gives approximate
wire size for the zero phase reactors but the
selection is ultimately governed by the type
and diameter of cable fitted i.e. the cable
must fit through the center hole of zero
phase reactors.
Note: 600V Insulated unshielded Cable.
Diagram A
Please wind each wire 4 times around the
core. The reactor must be put at inverter
output as close as possible.
Zero Phase Reactor
Power
Supply
R/L1
Note 2: Only the phase conductors should
pass through, not the earth core or screen.
Note 3: When long motor output cables are
used, an output zero phase reactor may be
required to reduce radiated emissions from
the cable.
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
MOTOR
B-31
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.8 DC Choke Recommended Values
460V DC Choke
Input voltage
460Vac
50/60Hz
3-Phase
kW
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
HP
0.5
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
DC Amps
2
4
9
9
12
18
25
32
Inductance (mh)
50.00
25.00
11.50
11.50
6.00
3.75
4.00
2.68
NOTE
It is built-in DC chock in 15kW to 132kW models, and built-in AC chock in 160kW to 185kW models.
B.9 No-fuse Circuit Breaker Chart
The fuse should comply with UL248 and the breaker should comply with UL489.
For 3-phase drives, the current rating of the breaker shall be within 2-4 times maximum input current
rating.
Model
VFD007B43W
VFD015B43W
VFD022B43W
VFD037B43W
VFD055B43W
VFD075B43W
VFD110B43W
VFD150B43W
VFD185B43W
VFD220B43W
VFD300B43W
VFD370B43W
VFD450B43W
VFD550B43W
VFD750B43W
VFD900B43W
VFD1100B43W
VFD1320B43W
VFD1600B43W
VFD1850B43W
B-36
3-phase
Recommended no-fuse breaker (A)
5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
175
250
300
300
400
500
600
600
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.10 Fuse Specification Chart
Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted.
Model
I (A)
Input
I (A)
Output
VFD007B43W
VFD015B43W
VFD022B43W
VFD037B43W
VFD055B43W
VFD075B43W
VFD110B43W
VFD150B43W
VFD185B43W
VFD220B43W
VFD300B43W
VFD370B43W
VFD450B43W
VFD550B43W
VFD750B43W
VFD900B43W
VFD1100B43W
VFD1320B43W
VFD1600B43W
VFD1850B43W
3.2
4.3
5.9
11.2
14
19
25
32
39
49
60
63
90
130
160
180
200
240
300
380
2.7
4.2
5.5
8.5
13
18
24
32
38
45
60
73
91
110
150
180
220
260
310
370
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
I (A)
5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
175
250
300
300
400
500
600
600
Line Fuse
Bussmann P/N
JJN-6
JJN-10
JJN-15
JJN-20
JJN-30
JJN-40
JJN-50
JJN-60
JJN-70
JJN-100
JJN-125
JJN-150
JJN-175
JJN-250
JJN-300
JJS-300
JJS-400
JJS-500
JJS-600
JJS-600
B-37
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
B.11 PU06
B.11.1 Description of the Digital keypad VFD-PU06
LED Display
Indicates frequency, voltage, current, user
defined units, read, and save, etc.
Frequency Command
Status indicator
Output Frequency
Status indicator
F
H
U
Model Number
VFD-PU06
User Defined Units
Status indicator
EXT PU
JOG
By pressing JOG key,
Jog frequency operation.
UP and DOWN Key
Set the parameter number
and changes the numerical
data, such as Master Frequency.
Status Display
Display the driver's current status.
MODE
JOG
PU
Left Key
Change between different display mode.
Right key
Move cursor to the left.
Move the cursor to the right
FWD/REV Key
Select FWD/REV operation.
RUN
STOP
RESET
STOP/RESET
Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive
after fault occurred.
RUN Key
Start AC drive operation.
B.11.2 Explanation of Display Message
Display Message
Descriptions
The AC motor drive Master Frequency Command.
The Actual Operation Frequency present at terminals U, V, and W.
The custom unit (u)
The output current present at terminals U, V, and W.
Press
to change the mode to READ. Press PROG/DATA for
about 2 sec or until it’s flashing, read the parameters of AC drive
to the digital keypad PU06. It can read 4 groups of parameters to
PU06. (read 0 - read 3)
to change the mode to SAVE. Press PROG/DATA for
Press
about 2 sec or until it’s flashing, then write the parameters from
the digital keypad PU06 to AC drive. If it has saved, it will show
the type of AC motor drive.
B-38
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
Display Message
Descriptions
The specified parameter setting.
The actual value stored in the specified parameter.
External Fault
“End” displays for approximately 1 second if the entered input data
have been accepted. After a parameter value has been set, the
new value is automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry,
or
use the
keys.
“Err” displays if the input is invalid.
Communication Error. Please check the AC motor drive user
manual (Chapter 5, Group 9 Communication Parameter) for more
details.
B.11.3 Operation Flow Chart
VFD-PU06 Operation Flow Chart
Or
XX
Press UP key to select
SAVE or READ.
Press PROG/DATA for
about 2 seconds or until
it is flashing, then save
parameters from PU06 to
AC drive or read parameters
from AC drive to PU06.
XX-XX
XXXXX
-ERRProgram
Error
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
-ENDProgram
Successful
B-39
Appendix B Accessories|VFD-BW Series
This page intentionally left blank.
B-40
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive
The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence
on its lifetime. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large, it cannot offer complete protection to
the motor and motor maybe damaged. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small, it cannot offer
the required performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading.
But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor, user application
requirements cannot be met completely. Therefore, a designer should consider all the conditions,
including load type, load speed, load characteristic, operation method, rated output, rated speed,
power and the change of load capacity. The following table lists the factors you need to consider,
depending on your requirements.
Related Specification
Item
Friction load and weight
load
Liquid (viscous) load
Load type
Inertia load
Load with power
transmission
Constant torque
Load speed and
Constant output
torque
Decreasing torque
characteristics
Decreasing output
Constant load
Shock load
Load
Repetitive load
characteristics
High starting torque
Low starting torque
Continuous operation, Short-time operation
Long-time operation at medium/low speeds
Maximum output current (instantaneous)
Constant output current (continuous)
Maximum frequency, Base frequency
Power supply transformer capacity or
percentage impedance
Voltage fluctuations and unbalance
Number of phases, single phase protection
Frequency
Mechanical friction, losses in wiring
Duty cycle modification
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Speed and
torque
characteristics
Time
ratings
Overload
capacity
●
Starting
torque
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
C-1
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|VFD-BW Series
C.1 Capacity Formulas
1. When one AC motor drive operates one motor
The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive
The starting capacity=
⎛
k×N
GD 2 N ⎞
⎜ TL +
× ⎟ ≤ 1.5 × the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive ( kVA)
973 × η × cos ϕ ⎜⎝
375 t A ⎟⎠
2. When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor
2.1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive
„
Acceleration time ≦60 seconds
The starting capacity=
k×N
η × cos ϕ
„
[n
⎡
T
+ ns (ks − 1)] = PC1⎢⎢1 +
⎢⎣
⎤
ns
(ks − 1)⎥⎥ ≤ 1.5 × the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
⎥⎦
nT
Acceleration time ≧60 seconds
The starting capacity=
k×N
η × cos ϕ
[n
T
⎡
+ ns (ks − 1)] = PC1⎢⎢1 +
⎢⎣
⎤
ns
(ks − 1)⎥⎥ ≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
⎥⎦
nT
2.2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
„
Acceleration time ≦60 seconds
nT + IM ⎡⎢⎣1+ nnTS ⎛⎜⎝ kS −1⎞⎟⎠ ⎤⎥⎦ ≤ 1.5 × the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)
„
Acceleration time ≧60 seconds
nT + IM ⎡⎢⎣1+ nnTS ⎛⎜⎝ kS −1⎞⎟⎠ ⎤⎥⎦ ≤ the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)
C-2
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|VFD-BW Series
2.3 When it is running continuously
„
The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive(kVA)
The requirement of load capacity=
k × PM
η × cosϕ
„
≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive
k × 3 × VM × IM × 10−3 ≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
„
The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
k × IM ≤ the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)
Symbol explanation
PM
: Motor shaft output for load (kW)
η
: Motor efficiency (normally, approx. 0.85)
cos ϕ
: Motor power factor (normally, approx. 0.75)
VM
: Motor rated voltage(V)
IM
: Motor rated current(A), for commercial power
k
: Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor (1.05 - 1.1, depending on
PWM method)
PC1
: Continuous motor capacity (kVA)
kS
: Starting current/rated current of motor
nT
nS
: Number of motors in parallel
GD 2
: Total inertia (GD2) calculated back to motor shaft (kg m2)
TL
: Load torque
tA
: Motor acceleration time
N
: Motor speed
: Number of simultaneously started motors
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
C-3
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|VFD-BW Series
C.2 General Precaution
Selection Note
1.
When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer
(600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents
may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid
this, use an AC input reactor (optional) before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the
current and improve the input power efficiency.
2.
When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single
AC Motor Drive, select the AC Motor Drive current ≥1.25x(Sum of the motor rated
currents).
3.
The starting and accel./decel. characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current
and the overload protection of the AC Motor Drive. Compared to running the motor D.O.L.
(Direct On-Line), a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected. If
higher starting torque is required (such as for elevators, mixers, tooling machines, etc.)
use an AC Motor Drive of higher capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor
and the AC Motor Drive.
4.
When an error occurs on the drive, a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor
Drive output is turned off. Then the motor will coast to stop. For an emergency stop, an
external mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor.
Parameter Settings Note
1.
The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz (less for some
models) with the digital keypad. Setting errors may create a dangerous situation. For
safety, the use of the upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended.
2.
High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time (at low frequencies) may
cause overheating of the motor. In that case, forced external motor cooling is
recommended.
3.
C-4
Motor accel./decel. time is determined by motor rated torque, load torque, and load inertia.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|VFD-BW Series
4.
If the stall prevention function is activated, the accel./decel. time is automatically extended
to a length that the AC Motor Drive can handle. If the motor needs to decelerate within a
certain time with high load inertia that can’t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the
required time, either use an external brake resistor and/or brake unit, depending on the
model, (to shorten deceleration time only) or increase the capacity for both the motor and
the AC Motor Drive.
C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor
Standard motor
When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the
following precautions:
1.
2.
The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor.
Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time. Under this condition, the motor
temperature may rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the
motor’s fan. Consider external forced motor cooling.
3.
When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time, the output load must be
decreased.
4.
The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows:
Load duty-cycle
25%
100
40% 60%
torque(%)
82
70
60
50
0
5.
continuous
3 6
20
Frequency (Hz)
60
If 100% continuous torque is required at low speed, it may be necessary to use a special
inverter duty motor.
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
C-5
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|VFD-BW Series
6.
Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating
speed exceeds the rated speed (60Hz) of a standard motor.
7.
Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power
supply drives the motor. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be
connected.
8.
Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series, pay attention to the
following motor vibration problems:
„
Resonant mechanical vibration: anti-vibration (damping) rubbers should be
„
Motor imbalance: special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and
„
To avoid resonances, use the Skip frequencies.
used to mount equipment that runs at varying speed.
higher frequency.
9.
The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz.
Special motors:
1.
Pole-changing (Dahlander) motor:
The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor. Please check before operation
and select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When changing the pole number
the motor needs to be stopped first. If over current occurs during operation or
regenerative voltage is too high, please let the motor free run to stop (coast).
2.
Submersible motor:
The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor. Please check before operation
and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. With long motor cable between
AC motor drive and motor, available motor torque is reduced.
3.
Explosion-proof (Ex) motor:
Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex)
requirements. Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special
precautions.
4.
Gear reduction motor:
The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation
will be different and depending on brand. The lubricating function for operating long time
at low speed and for high-speed operation needs to be considered carefully.
C-6
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|VFD-BW Series
5.
Synchronous motor:
The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors. Please check
before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When the AC
motor drive operates more than one motor, please pay attention to starting and changing
the motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism
Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors, gearboxes, belts
and chains, etc. over longer periods at low speeds. At high speeds of 50/60Hz and above,
lifetime reducing noises and vibrations may occur.
Motor torque
The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains
power are different.
Below you’ll find the torque-speed characteristics of a standard motor (4-pole, 15kW):
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
C-7
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|VFD-BW Series
AC motor drive
Motor
180
60 seconds
155
140
100
80
55
38
03 20
03 20
50
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/f for 220V/50Hz
C-8
180
150
torque (%)
torque (%)
45
35
55
38
60
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz
V/f for 220V/60Hz
60 seconds
100
85
68
100
0 3 20
60
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz
V/f for 220V/60Hz
140
130
60 seconds
155
torque (%)
torque (%)
180
60 seconds
100
80
45
35
0 20 50
120
3
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/f for 220V/50Hz
Revision May 2009, BWE0, SW V1.05
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement